Users Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsPowerSwitch S3048-ON

Dell Configuration Guide for the S3048–ON

System

9.11(0.0)

Summary of content (1031 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Configuration Guide for the S3048–ON System 9.11(0.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2017 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................33 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................33 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
Upgrading Dell Networking OS...................................................................................................................................... 57 Verify Software Images Before Installation.................................................................................................................. 57 Using HTTP for File Transfers....................................................................................................................................... 58 4 Management......
PAGE 5
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode....................................................................................................................81 Using Telnet to get to Another Network Device..........................................................................................................81 Lock CONFIGURATION Mode.......................................................................................................................................82 Viewing the Configuration Lock Status..
PAGE 6
Continue Clause........................................................................................................................................................ 115 IP Fragment Handling..................................................................................................................................................... 116 IP Fragments ACL Examples...................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
Troubleshooting BFD............................................................................................................................................... 163 9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)....................................................................................................165 Autonomous Systems (AS).......................................................................................................................................... 165 Sessions and Peers...................
PAGE 8
Configuring the local System or a Different System to be the Next Hop for BGP-Learned Routes........... 202 Changing the WEIGHT Attribute...........................................................................................................................203 Enabling Multipath...................................................................................................................................................203 Filtering BGP Routes...........................................................
PAGE 9
Configure a Method of Hostname Resolution..................................................................................................... 245 Using DNS for Address Resolution........................................................................................................................245 Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution..................................................................................................... 246 Creating Manual Binding Entries...............................
PAGE 10
Multiple FRRP Rings................................................................................................................................................270 Important FRRP Points............................................................................................................................................271 Important FRRP Concepts..................................................................................................................................... 272 Implementing FRRP..
PAGE 11
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP).........................................................................................292 IGMP Implementation Information.............................................................................................................................. 292 IGMP Protocol Overview..............................................................................................................................................292 IGMP Version 2...............................
PAGE 12
Physical Interfaces.........................................................................................................................................................324 Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces................................................................................................... 324 Overview of Layer Modes......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 13
Enabling Pause Frames........................................................................................................................................... 348 Configure the MTU Size on an Interface................................................................................................................... 348 Port-Pipes.......................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 14
Enabling UDP Helper......................................................................................................................................................371 Configuring a Broadcast Address.................................................................................................................................371 Configurations Using UDP Helper...............................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
Transition Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 397 Interface Support.................................................................................................................................................... 398 Adjacencies...............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
mac learning-limit Dynamic.....................................................................................................................................437 mac learning-limit mac-address-sticky................................................................................................................. 437 mac learning-limit station-move............................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
Microsoft Clustering......................................................................................................................................................470 Enable and Disable VLAN Flooding .............................................................................................................................470 Configuring a Switch for NLB .....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
Modifying the Interface Parameters............................................................................................................................501 Configuring an EdgePort.............................................................................................................................................. 502 Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change...................................................................................................... 503 MSTP Sample Configurations....
PAGE 19
Setting OSPF Adjacency with Cisco Routers......................................................................................................545 Configuration Information............................................................................................................................................ 546 Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4)....................................................................................... 546 Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)...
PAGE 20
Important Points to Remember..............................................................................................................................591 Configure PIM-SSM......................................................................................................................................................592 Related Configuration Tasks.................................................................................................................................. 592 Enabling PIM-SSM.....
PAGE 21
Influencing PVST+ Root Selection.............................................................................................................................. 625 Modifying Global PVST+ Parameters......................................................................................................................... 627 Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters.................................................................................................................... 628 Configuring an EdgePort..........
PAGE 22
40 Routing Information Protocol (RIP).........................................................................................................667 Protocol Overview.........................................................................................................................................................667 RIPv1..........................................................................................................................................................................667 RIPv2........
PAGE 23
RADIUS........................................................................................................................................................................... 705 RADIUS Authentication...........................................................................................................................................705 Configuration Task List for RADIUS......................................................................................................................706 TACACS+...
PAGE 24
VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence.................................................................................................................. 746 Enabling Drop Eligibility........................................................................................................................................... 746 Honoring the Incoming DEI Value..........................................................................................................................
PAGE 25
Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps.............................................................................................................................. 769 Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure........................................................................................ 771 Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP....................................................................................................................... 772 Copying a Configuration File................
PAGE 26
Stacking LAG........................................................................................................................................................... 800 Supported Stacking Topologies.............................................................................................................................800 High Availability on Stacks......................................................................................................................................
PAGE 27
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes......................................................................... 832 Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless....................................................................................................................... 832 STP Loop Guard............................................................................................................................................................ 832 Configuring Loop Guard.................
PAGE 28
Clearing a UFD-Disabled Interface.............................................................................................................................. 862 Displaying Uplink Failure Detection..............................................................................................................................863 Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection........................................................................................................ 865 55 Upgrade Procedures.......
PAGE 29
Dell-1 Switch Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 907 Dell-2 Switch Configuration.....................................................................................................................................911 R1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 30
59 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF).....................................................................................................952 VRF Overview................................................................................................................................................................952 VRF Configuration Notes............................................................................................................................................. 953 DHCP...................
PAGE 31
Troubleshoot an Under-Voltage Condition..........................................................................................................1001 Troubleshooting Packet Loss..................................................................................................................................... 1002 Displaying Drop Counters......................................................................................................................................1002 Dataplane Statistics.............
PAGE 32
Verifying Server certificates..................................................................................................................................1031 Verifying client certificates.................................................................................................................................... 1031 Event logging.................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 33
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. S3048–ON stacking is supported with Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.1) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
PAGE 34
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
PAGE 35
You can set user access rights to commands and command modes using privilege levels. For more information about privilege levels and security options, refer to the Privilege Levels Overview section in the Security chapter. The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level.
PAGE 36
PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP PREFIX-LIST PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
PAGE 37
CLI Command Mode Prompt 40 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Access Command interface (INTERFACE modes) Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-ma-1/1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Null Interface Dell(conf-if-nu-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Port-channel Interface Dell(conf-if-po-1)# interface (I
PAGE 38
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command ROUTER RIP Dell(conf-router_rip)# router rip SPANNING TREE Dell(config-span)# protocol spanning-tree 0 TRACE-LIST Dell(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP Dell(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP Dell(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL Dell(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP Dell(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup-id)# ecmp-group EIS Dell(conf-mgmt-eis)# management egres
PAGE 39
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
PAGE 40
Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword. • Enter ? after a command prompt to list all of the available keywords.
PAGE 41
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Ends continuous scrolling of command outputs. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
PAGE 42
The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command. Example of the except Keyword Dell#show system brief | except 1 Stack MAC Reload-Type : 4c:76:25:e5:49:40 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] The find keyword displays the output of the show command beginning from the first occurrence of specified text.
PAGE 43
• On the system that telnets into the switch, this message appears: % Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system: User "" on line console0 • On the system that is connected over the console, this message appears: % Warning: User "" on line vty0 "10.11.130.
PAGE 44
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
PAGE 45
Console Access The device has one RJ-45/RS-232 console port, an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port, and a micro USB-B console port. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1. RJ-45 Console Port Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1 Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port.
PAGE 46
Table 2.
PAGE 47
• To avoid denial of service (DoS) attacks, a rate-limit of 10 concurrent sessions per minute in SSH is devised. Therefore, you might experience a failure in executing SSH-related scripts when multiple short SSH commands are executed. • If you issue an interactive command in the SSH session, the behavior may not really be interactive.
PAGE 48
Configure the Management Port IP Address To access the system remotely, assign IP addresses to the management ports. 1 Enter INTERFACE mode for the Management port. CONFIGURATION mode interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2 Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask 3 • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). • mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). Enable the interface.
PAGE 49
Configuring the Enable Password Access EXEC Privilege mode using the enable command. EXEC Privilege mode is unrestricted by default. Configure a password as a basic security measure. There are three types of enable passwords: • enable password is stored in the running/startup configuration using a DES encryption method. • enable secret is stored in the running/startup configuration using MD5 encryption method.
PAGE 50
Location source-file-url Syntax destination-file-url Syntax copy tftp://{hostip | hostname}/filepath/ filename tftp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/filename FTP server For a remote file location: TFTP server For a remote file location: SCP server copy scp://{hostip | hostname}/ scp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/ filename filepath/filename Important Points to Remember • You may not copy a file from one remote system to another. • You may not copy a file from one location to the same location.
PAGE 51
Table 5. Forming a copy Command Location source-file-url Syntax destination-file-url Syntax For a remote file location: copy nfsmount://{}/filepath/filename} username:password tftp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/filename NFS File System Important Points to Remember • You cannot copy a file from one remote system to another. • You cannot copy a file from one location to the same location.
PAGE 52
Save the Running-Configuration The running-configuration contains the current system configuration. Dell Networking recommends coping your running-configuration to the startup-configuration. The commands in this section follow the same format as those commands in the Copy Files to and from the System section but use the filenames startup-configuration and running-configuration. These commands assume that current directory is the internal flash, which is the system default.
PAGE 53
show startup-config Example of the dir Command The output of the dir command also shows the read/write privileges, size (in bytes), and date of modification for each file.
PAGE 54
The following table describes how the standard and the compressed configuration differ: Table 6. Standard and Compressed Configurations int vlan 2 int vlan 3 int vlan 4 int vlan 5 int vlan 100 int vlan 1000 no ip address tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 no ip address ip address 1.1.1.
PAGE 55
shutdown no ip address ! shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/34 ! ip address 2.1.1.1/16 interface Vlan 1000 shutdown ip address 1.1.1.1/16 ! no shutdown interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines. ! interface Vlan 3 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.
PAGE 56
Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
PAGE 57
that run on a device. You can employ this capability to perform an on-demand activation, or turn-off a software component or protocol. A feature configuration file generated for each image contains feature names, and denotes if this enabling or disabling method is available. You can enable or disable the VRF application globally across the system by using this capability. Activate the VRF application on a device by using the feature vrf command in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 58
copy is exactly the same as the published software image. This validation procedure, and the verify {md5 | sha256} command to support it, prevents the installation of corrupted or modified images. The verify {md5 | sha256} command calculates and displays the hash of any file on the specified local flash drive. You can compare the displayed hash against the appropriate hash published on iSupport.
PAGE 59
• To copy the running configuration, enter the keyword running-config. • To copy the startup configuration, enter the keyword startup-config. • To copy a file on the USB device, enter usbflash:// followed by the filename. In the Dell Networking OS release 9.8(0.0), HTTP services support the VRF-aware functionality. If you want the HTTP server to use a VRF table that is attached to an interface, configure that HTTP server to use a specific routing table.
PAGE 60
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
PAGE 61
• restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below. Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 62
• Remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} • Move a command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level {command ||...|| command} • Allow access to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIGURATION mode privilege exec level level configure • Allow access to INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode. Specify all the keywords in the command.
PAGE 63
managementethernet Management Ethernet interface null Null interface port-channel Port-channel interface range Configure interface range sonet SONET interface tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN interface Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#? end Exit from configuration mode exit Exit from interface configuration mode Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#exit Dell(conf)#line ? aux Auxiliary line console Primary terminal line vty Virtual terminal Dell(conf)#line vty 0 Dell
PAGE 64
• Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on • Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs.
PAGE 65
• Adding and deleting of users. • User access and configuration changes to the security and crypto parameters (not the key information but the crypto configuration) Important Points to Remember When you enabled RBAC and extended logging: • Only the system administrator user role can execute this command. • The system administrator and system security administrator user roles can view security events and system events.
PAGE 66
The following describes the two log messages formats: • 0 – Displays syslog messages format as described in RFC 3164, The BSD syslog Protocol • 1 – Displays syslog message format as described in RFC 5424, The SYSLOG Protocol Example of Configuring the Logging Message Format Dell(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) Dell(conf)#logging version 1 Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration To display the current contents of the logging buffer and the logging setti
PAGE 67
Figure 2. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1 On the switch, enable the SSH server Dell(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2 On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.
PAGE 68
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
PAGE 69
The following example enables login activity tracking and configures the system to store the login activity details for 12 days. Dell(config)#login statistics enable Dell(config)#login statistics time-period 12 Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
PAGE 70
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
PAGE 71
login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. Dell(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
PAGE 72
Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. • Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration. Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled. If you do not want to enter the secured mode, do not save the running-configuration.
PAGE 73
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
PAGE 74
• Specify the size of the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode logging buffered size • NOTE: When you decrease the buffer size, Dell Networking OS deletes all messages stored in the buffer. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages in the buffer. Specify the number of messages that Dell Networking OS saves to its logging history table.
PAGE 75
To view any changes made, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode. Configuring a UNIX Logging Facility Level You can save system log messages with a UNIX system logging facility. To configure a UNIX logging facility level, use the following command. • Specify one of the following parameters.
PAGE 76
Synchronizing Log Messages You can configure Dell Networking OS to filter and consolidate the system messages for a specific line by synchronizing the message output. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level appear. This feature works on the terminal and console connections available on the system. 1 Enter LINE mode.
PAGE 77
File Transfer Services With Dell Networking OS, you can configure the system to transfer files over the network using the file transfer protocol (FTP). One FTP application is copying the system image files over an interface on to the system; however, FTP is not supported on virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. If you want the FTP or TFTP server to use a VRF table that is attached to an interface, you must configure the FTP or TFTP server to use a specific routing table.
PAGE 78
• Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password Configure the following optional and required parameters: • username: enter a text string. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: enter a text string. NOTE: You cannot use the change directory (cd) command until you have configured ftp-server topdir.
PAGE 79
Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines. • Layer 3 ACLs deny all traffic that is not explicitly permitted, but in the case of VTY lines, an ACL with no rules does not deny traffic. • You cannot use the show ip accounting access-list command to display the contents of an ACL that is applied only to a VTY line.
PAGE 80
exec-timeout 0 0 access-class testpermit ipv4 access-class testv6deny ipv6 ! Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a terminal line. A combination of authentication methods is called a method list. If the user fails the first authentication method, Dell Networking OS prompts the next method until all methods are exhausted, at which point the connection is terminated.
PAGE 81
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. • Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the timeout period to 0. LINE mode exec-timeout minutes [seconds] • Return to the default timeout values.
PAGE 82
login: admin Dell# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set autolock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
PAGE 83
reload conditional nvram-cfg-change • Reload the system into the Dell diagnostics mode. EXEC Privilege mode reload dell-diag • Reload the system into the ONIE mode. EXEC Privilege mode reload onie [install | uninstall | rescue] Use the install parameter to reload the system and enter the Install mode to install a networking OS. Use the uninstall parameter to reload the system and enter the Uninstall mode to uninstall a networking OS.
PAGE 84
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
PAGE 85
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
PAGE 86
• Configuring Timeouts • Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication • Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
PAGE 87
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
PAGE 88
Configuring dot1x Profile You can configure a dot1x profile for defining a list of trusted supplicant MAC addresses. A maximum of 10 dot1x profiles can be configured. The profile name length is limited to 32 characters. Thedot1x profile {profile-name} command sets the dot1x profile mode and you can enter profile-related commands, such as the mac command. To configure a dot1x profile, use the following commands. • Configure a dot1x profile.
PAGE 89
dot1x static-mab profile profile-name Eenter a name to configure the static MAB profile name. The profile name length is limited to a maximum of 32 characters. Example of Static MAB and MAB Profile for an Interface Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x static-mab profile sample Dell(conf-if-Te 2/1))#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 21 switchport dot1x static-mab profile sample no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te 2/1))#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 802.
PAGE 90
no shutdown Dell#show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 802.
PAGE 91
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.
PAGE 92
In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. Dell#show dot1x interface GigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
PAGE 93
• Configure the maximum number of times the authenticator re-transmits a Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x max-eap-req number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. The example in Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame after 90 seconds and re-transmits for 10 times.
PAGE 94
Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port The 802.1X ports can be placed into any of the three states: • ForceAuthorized — an authorized state. A device connected to this port in this state is never subjected to the authentication process, but is allowed to communicate on the network. Placing the port in this state is same as disabling 802.1X on the port. • ForceUnauthorized — an unauthorized state.
PAGE 95
dot1x reauthentication [interval] seconds The range is from 1 to 31536000. • The default is 3600. Configure the maximum number of times the supplicant can be re-authenticated. INTERFACE mode dot1x reauth-max number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2. Example of Re-Authenticating a Port and Verifying the Configuration The bold lines show that re-authentication is enabled and the new maximum and re-authentication time period.
PAGE 96
The default is 30. Example of Viewing Configured Server Timeouts The example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator terminates the authentication process for an unresponsive supplicant or server after 15 seconds. The bold lines show the new supplicant and server timeouts. Dell(conf-if-Gi-1/1)#dot1x port-control force-authorized Dell(conf-if-Gi-1/1)#do show dot1x interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 802.
PAGE 97
Figure 8. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1 Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2 Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3 Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4 Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X.
PAGE 98
The Guest VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to non-802.1X capable devices and the Authentication-fail VLAN 802.1X extension addresses this limitation with regard to external users. • • If the supplicant fails authentication a specified number of times, the authenticator places the port in the Authentication-fail VLAN. If a port is already forwarding on the Guest VLAN when 802.1X is enabled, the port is moved out of the Guest VLAN and the authentication process begins.
PAGE 99
no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-2/1)# Example of Viewing Configured Authentication View your configuration using the show config command from INTERFACE mode, as shown in the example in Configuring a Guest VLAN or using the show dot1x interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. 802.
PAGE 100
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs To minimize the number of entries in CAM, enable and configure the ACL CAM feature. Use this feature when you apply ACLs to a VLAN (or a set of VLANs) and when you apply ACLs to a set of ports.
PAGE 101
• The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. • The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. • The description of the ACL group is added or removed. Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: • The interfaces where you apply the ACL VLAN group function as restricted interfaces.
PAGE 102
description description 3 Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4 Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5 Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
PAGE 103
EXEC Privilege mode Dell#show cam-usage switch Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|============|============|============= 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub- partitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 104
2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL 3 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
PAGE 105
To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands. By default, zero groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You must also allocate the slices for CAM optimization. To display the number of FP blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services, use the show cam-acl-vlan command. After you configure the ACL VLAN groups, reboot the system to store the settings in nonvolatile storage.
PAGE 106
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 107
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • Important Points to Remember • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Logging of ACL Processes • Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell Networking switch/routers,
PAGE 108
CAM Usage The following section describes CAM allocation and CAM optimization. • User Configurable CAM Allocation • CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.
PAGE 109
If counters are enabled on ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule which is inserted or prepended or appended requires a hardware shift in the flow table. Resetting the counters to 0 is transient as the proginal counter values are retained after a few seconds. If there is no need to shift the flow in the hardware, the counters are not affected.
PAGE 110
Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 4 class-map cmap2 Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#exit Dell(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 10/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-10/1)#service-policy input pmap Important Points to Remember • For route-maps with more than one match clause: • Two or more match clauses within the same route-map sequence have the same match commands (though the values are different), matching a packet against these clauses is a logical OR operation.
PAGE 111
You can create multiple instances of this route map by using the sequence number option to place the route maps in the correct order. Dell Networking OS processes the route maps with the lowest sequence number first. When a configured route map is applied to a command, such as redistribute, traffic passes through all instances of that route map until a match is found. The following is an example with two instances of a route map. The following example shows matching instances of a route-map.
PAGE 112
Example of the match Command to Match Any of Several Values The following example shows using the match command to match any of several values. Dell(conf)#route-map force permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 2000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 3000 Example of the match Command to Match All Specified Values In the next example, there is a match only if a route has both of the specified characteristics.
PAGE 113
• • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip address prefix-list-name • Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ipv6 address prefix-list-name • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4).
PAGE 114
• Generate a tag to be added to redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set automatic-tag • Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} • Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value • Specify a value for redistributed routes.
PAGE 115
Route maps add to that redistribution capability by allowing you to match specific routes and set or change more attributes when redistributing those routes. In the following example, the redistribute command calls the route map static ospf to redistribute only certain static routes into OSPF. According to the route map static ospf, only routes that have a next hop of Tengigabitethernet interface 1/1 and that have a metric of 255 are redistributed into the OSPF backbone area.
PAGE 116
IP Fragment Handling Dell Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/ deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp). • Both standard and extended ACLs support IP fragments. • Second and subsequent fragments are allowed because a Layer 4 rule cannot be applied to these fragments.
PAGE 117
Example of Permitting All Packets from a Specified Host In this first example, TCP packets from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted. All others are denied. Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.
PAGE 118
Example of Viewing the Rules of a Specific ACL on an Interface The following is an example of viewing the rules of a specific ACL on an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.0 /16 seq 25 deny 10.5.0.0 /16 seq 30 deny 10.6.0.0 /16 seq 35 deny 10.7.0.0 /16 seq 40 deny 10.8.0.0 /16 seq 45 deny 10.9.0.0 /16 seq 50 deny 10.10.0.
PAGE 119
To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 monitor 300 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.
PAGE 120
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1 Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2 Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
PAGE 121
{deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
PAGE 122
Assign an IP ACL to an Interface To pass traffic through a configured IP ACL, assign that ACL to a physical interface, a port channel interface, or a VLAN. The IP ACL is applied to all traffic entering a physical or port channel interface and the traffic is either forwarded or dropped depending on the criteria and actions specified in the ACL. The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality.
PAGE 123
Counting ACL Hits You can view the number of packets matching the ACL by using the count option when creating ACL entries. 1 Create an ACL that uses rules with the count option. Refer to Configure a Standard IP ACL Filter. 2 Apply the ACL as an inbound or outbound ACL on an interface. 3 show ip accounting access-list EXEC Privilege mode View the number of packets matching the ACL. Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system.
PAGE 124
To create an egress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows viewing the configuration, applying rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list. NOTE: VRF based ACL configurations are not supported on the egress traffic. Example of Applying ACL Rules to Egress Traffic and Viewing ACL Configuration To specify ingress, use the out keyword. Begin applying rules to the ACL with the ip access-list extended abcd command.
PAGE 125
CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 control-plane [egress filter] 3 Create a Layer 3 ACL using permit rules with the count option to describe the desired CPU traffic. CONFIG-NACL mode permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} count [monitor [session-id]] Dell Networking OS Behavior: Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) hellos and internet group management protocol (IGMP) packets are not affected when you enable egress ACL filtering for CPU traffic.
PAGE 126
• Configuring a prefix list • Use a prefix list for route redistribution For a complete listing of all commands related to prefix lists, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1 Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action.
PAGE 127
ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list filter with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). • le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32).
PAGE 128
Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 Dell> Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process.
PAGE 129
If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | rip | static] Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER OSPF mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.
PAGE 130
resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} • IPv4 or IPv6 prefix-list EXEC mode resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Examples of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number or Different Numbers Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command.
PAGE 131
Route Maps Although route maps are similar to ACLs and prefix lists in that they consist of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action, route maps can modify parameters in matching packets. Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
PAGE 132
• For IP packets that contain the transport layer protocol as Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) or User Datagram Protocol (UDP), the ACL name, sequence number, ACL action (permit or deny), source and destination MAC addresses, source and destination IP addresses, and the source and destination ports (Layer 4 parameters) are also recorded. If the packet contains an unidentified EtherType or transport layer protocol, the values for these parameters are saved as Unknown in the log message.
PAGE 133
CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [log [thresholdin-msgs count] ] 2 Specify the interval in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. You can enter an interval in the range of 1-10 minutes. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold has exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses.
PAGE 134
The ACL agent module saves monitoring details in its local database and also in the CAM region to monitor packets that match the specified criterion. The ACL agent maintains data on the source port, the destination port, and the endpoint to which the packet must be forwarded when a match occurs with the ACL entry. If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flowbased monitoring and port mirroring do not function.
PAGE 135
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported on the platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1 Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session.
PAGE 136
0 N/A 136 Gi 1/1 yes Gi 1/2 Access Control Lists (ACLs) rx Flow N/A N/A 0 0 No N/A
PAGE 137
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
PAGE 138
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
PAGE 139
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
PAGE 140
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
PAGE 141
Figure 10.
PAGE 142
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
PAGE 143
• Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol.
PAGE 144
Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-gi-4/24)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 145
Configuring BFD for static routes is a three-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Configure static routes on both routers on the system (either local or remote). 3 Configure an IP route to connect BFD on the static routes using the ip route bfd command. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing Static Route Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 12.
PAGE 146
To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list. When you establish a BFD session using the ip route bfd command, all the next-hop neighbors in the static route become part of the BFD session. Starting with Dell Networking OS release 9.11.0.
PAGE 147
• Change parameters for all static route sessions. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down.
PAGE 148
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
PAGE 149
The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.2 Gi 2/2 Up 100 100 3 O Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role.
PAGE 150
Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors. NOTE: BFD for OSPFv3 with ECMP is not supported. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface.
PAGE 151
ip ospf bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command. Disabling BFD for OSPF If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state.
PAGE 152
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
PAGE 153
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
PAGE 154
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: 1 Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect, as described in Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4). 2 Enable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors to reduce convergence time (the neighbor fall-over command), as described in BGP Fast Fall-Over. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect.
PAGE 155
BFD notifies BGP of any failure conditions that it detects on the link. Recovery actions are initiated by BGP. BFD for BGP is supported only on directly-connected BGP neighbors and only in BGP IPv4 networks. Up to 128 simultaneous BFD sessions are supported As long as each BFD for BGP neighbor receives a BFD control packet within the configured BFD interval for failure detection, the BFD session remains up and BGP maintains its adjacencies.
PAGE 156
The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd allneighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable • Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
PAGE 157
EXEC Privilege mode show ip bgp neighbors [ip-address] Examples of Verifying BGP Information The following example shows verifying a BGP configuration. R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors.
PAGE 158
Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 159
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
PAGE 160
R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.4, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM).
PAGE 161
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
PAGE 162
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. Dell(conf-if-gi-4/25)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors Dell(conf-if-gi-4/25)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr * 2.2.5.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.5.2 Gi 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
PAGE 163
To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group. VRRP mode • bfd disable Disable a particular VRRP session on an interface.
PAGE 164
00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Gi 4/24 (diag: 0) The following example shows hexadecimal output from the debug bfd packet command. RX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:13 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.2 on Gi 4/24 TX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:14 : Received packet for session with neighbor 2.
PAGE 165
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
PAGE 166
Protocol). IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
PAGE 167
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
PAGE 168
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
PAGE 169
Figure 19. BGP Router Rules 1 Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2 Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B.
PAGE 170
Best Path Selection Criteria Paths for active routes are grouped in ascending order according to their neighboring external AS number (BGP best path selection is deterministic by default, which means the bgp non-deterministic-med command is NOT applied). The best path in each group is selected based on specific criteria. Only one “best path” is selected at a time. If any of the criteria results in more than one path, BGP moves on to the next option in the list.
PAGE 171
a An AS_SET has a path length of 1, no matter how many ASs are in the set. b A path with no AS_PATH configured has a path length of 0. c AS_CONFED_SET is not included in the AS_PATH length. d AS_CONFED_SEQUENCE has a path length of 1, no matter how many ASs are in the AS_CONFED_SEQUENCE. 5 Prefer the path with the lowest ORIGIN type (IGP is lower than EGP, and EGP is lower than INCOMPLETE). 6 Prefer the path with the lowest multi-exit discriminator (MED) attribute.
PAGE 172
shorter (one hop instead of two), the LOCAL_PREF settings have the preferred path go through Router B and AS300. This is advertised to all routers within AS100, causing all BGP speakers to prefer the path through Router B. Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path.
PAGE 173
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
PAGE 174
AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
PAGE 175
MBGP uses either an IPv4 address configured on the interface (which is used to establish the IPv6 session) or a stable IPv4 address that is available in the box as the next-hop address. As a result, while advertising an IPv6 network, exchange of IPv4 routes does not lead to martian next-hop message logs. NOTE: It is possible to configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast network layer reachability information (NLRI), but you cannot connect multiprotocol BGP with BGP.
PAGE 176
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
PAGE 177
ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10. Dynamic AS Number Notation Application Dell Networking OS applies the ASN notation type change dynamically to the running-config statements.
PAGE 178
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
PAGE 179
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
PAGE 180
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
PAGE 181
Item Default suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes external distance = 20 Distance internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 keepalive = 60 seconds Timers holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. Dell Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To establish BGP sessions and route traffic, configure at least one BGP neighbor or peer.
PAGE 182
Disable 4-Byte support and return to the default 2-Byte format by using the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. You cannot disable 4-Byte support if you currently have a 4-Byte ASN configured. b Disabling 4-Byte AS numbers also disables ASDOT and ASDOT+ number representation. All AS numbers are displayed in ASPLAIN format. Enable IPv4 multicast or IPv6 mode. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family [ipv4 | ipv6} vrf Use this command to enter BGP for IPv6 mode (CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_AF).
PAGE 183
The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output (4–byte AS number displays). R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.10.2, local AS number 48735.
PAGE 184
BGP state IDLE, in this state for 17:12:40 Last read 17:12:40, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Sent 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Received 0 updates, Sent 0 updates Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 0, neighbor version 0 0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No activ
PAGE 185
To configure AS4 number representations, use the following commands. • Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. • Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation.
PAGE 186
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
PAGE 187
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
PAGE 188
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is zanzibar, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 26 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.68.160.1 10.68.161.1 10.68.162.1 10.68.163.1 10.68.164.1 10.68.165.1 10.68.166.1 10.68.167.1 10.68.168.1 10.68.169.1 10.68.170.1 10.68.171.1 10.68.172.1 10.68.173.1 10.68.174.1 10.68.175.1 10.68.176.1 10.68.177.1 10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.
PAGE 189
BGP neighbor is 100.100.100.100, remote AS 65517, internal link Member of peer-group test for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 30.30.30.
PAGE 190
neighbor 100.100.100.100 no shutdown Dell# Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
PAGE 191
• No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration.
PAGE 192
router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.
PAGE 193
• The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise, it is disabled.
PAGE 194
To configure an AS-PATH ACL to filter a specific AS_PATH value, use these commands in the following sequence. 1 Assign a name to a AS-PATH ACL and enter AS-PATH ACL mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Enter the parameter to match BGP AS-PATH for filtering. CONFIG-AS-PATH mode {deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions.
PAGE 195
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 196
Dell(config-as-path)#deny 32$ Dell(config-as-path)#ex Dell(conf)#router bgp 99 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
PAGE 197
Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Dell Networking OS recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1 Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp add-path [both|received|send] path-count count The range is from 2 to 64.
PAGE 198
• • • • • local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. regexp: then a regular expression.
PAGE 199
deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny Dell# 701:20 702:20 703:20 704:20 705:20 14551:20 701:112 702:112 703:112 704:112 705:112 14551:112 701:667 702:667 703:667 704:666 705:666 14551:666 Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group.
PAGE 200
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute. To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. • Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified.
PAGE 201
Example of the show ip bgp community Command To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.
PAGE 202
• Change the LOCAL_PREF value. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value • value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
PAGE 203
• If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address If the set next-hop command is applied on the out-bound interface using a route map, it takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.
PAGE 204
NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports up to 255 characters in a set community statement inside a route map. NOTE: You can create inbound and outbound policies. Each of the commands used for filtering has in and out parameters that you must apply. In Dell Networking OS, the order of preference varies depending on whether the attributes are applied for inbound updates or outbound updates.
PAGE 205
• If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). • After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route.
PAGE 206
ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
PAGE 207
To view a route reflector configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp in EXEC Privilege mode. Aggregating Routes Dell Networking OS provides multiple ways to aggregate routes in the BGP routing table. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command.
PAGE 208
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Enabling Route Flap Dampening When EBGP routes become unavailable, they “flap” and the router issues both WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices. A flap is when a route: • is withdrawn • is readvertised after being withdrawn • has an attribute change The constant router reaction to the WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices causes instability in the BGP process.
PAGE 209
• • reuse: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed). The default is 750. • suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.
PAGE 210
BGP table version is 855562, main routing table version 780266 122836 network entrie(s) and 221664 paths using 29697640 bytes of memory 34298 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 1920688 bytes of memory 29577 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 1384403 bytes of memory 184 BGP community entrie(s) using 7616 bytes of memory Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.
PAGE 211
To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if a routerefresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
PAGE 212
2 In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface. You can also enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast or multicast groups and the IPv6 unicast groups.
PAGE 213
NOTE: This behavior applies to all BGP neighbors. Meaning, BGP neighbors that were explicitly disabled before global shutdown also remain in disabled state. Enable these neighbors individually using the no shutdown command. Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one routemap entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number).
PAGE 214
• If the peer has not been activated in any AFI/SAFI, the peer remains in Idle state. Most Dell Networking OS BGP IPv4 unicast commands are extended to support the IPv4 multicast RIB using extra options to the command. For a detailed description of the MBGP commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. • Enables support for the IPv4 multicast family on the BGP node.
PAGE 215
debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration To enhance debugging of soft reconfig, use the bgp soft-reconfig-backup command only when route-refresh is not negotiated to avoid the peer from resending messages. In-BGP is shown using the show ip protocols command. Dell Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 216
Last notification (len 21) received 00:26:20 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Last PDU (len 41) received 00:26:02 ago that caused notification to be issued ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290200 00000e01 02040201 00024003 04141414 0218c0a8 01000000 Local host: 1.1.1.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 1.1.1.2, Foreign port: 41758 Capturing PDUs To capture incoming and outgoing PDUs on a per-peer basis, use the capture bgp-pdu neighbor direction command.
PAGE 217
Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 172.30.1.250 Available buffer size 29165743, 192991 packet(s) captured using 11794257 bytes [. . .] Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bg s BGP router identifier 172.30.1.
PAGE 218
Figure 24. Sample Configurations Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int gi 1/21 R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-gi-1/21)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.
PAGE 219
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 220
R3(conf-if-gi-3/11)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/11)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int gi 3/21 R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)# R3(conf-if-gi-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.
PAGE 221
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1, neighbor version 1 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connect
PAGE 222
2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 128 bytes of memory 2 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 90 bytes of memory 2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.
PAGE 223
BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.128.
PAGE 224
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 225
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
PAGE 226
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number ecfmacl number nlbcluster number ipv4pbr number openflow number | fcoe number iscsioptacl number [vrfv4acl number] NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system.
PAGE 227
L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Dell(conf)# Example of Viewing CAM-ACL Settings NOTE: If you change the cam-acl setting from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis.
PAGE 228
Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dell# View CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each ACL partition using the show cam-usage command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 229
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 230
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
PAGE 231
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
PAGE 232
8 Assign the protocol based the service policy on the control plane. Enabling this command on a port-pipe automatically enables the ACL and QoS rules creates with the cpu-qos keyword. CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
PAGE 233
Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies.
PAGE 234
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy CoPP for OSPFv3 Packets You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRP, BGP, and ICMP. You can use the ipv6 access-list name cpu-qos permit ospfv3 command to allow CoPP traffic for OSPFv3.
PAGE 235
As part of enhancements, CPU queues are increased from 8 to 12 on CPU port. However, the front-end port and the backplane ports support only 8 queues. As a result, when packets are transmitted to the local CPU, the CPU uses Q0-Q11 queues. The control packets that are tunneled to the master unit are isolated from the data queues and the control queues in the backplane links. Control traffic must be sent over the control queues Q4-Q7 on higig links.
PAGE 236
• NDP Packets in VLT peer routing enable • • VLT peer routing enable cases each VLT node will have route entry for link local address of both self and peer VLT node. Peer VLT link local entry will have egress port as ICL link. And Actual link local address will have entry to CopyToCpu. But NDP packets destined to peer VLT node needs to be taken to CPU and tunneled to the peer VLT node..
PAGE 237
unknown unicast packets. This CLI knob to turn off the catch-all route is of use in networks where the user does not want to generate Destination Unreachable messages and have the CPU queue’s bandwidth available for higher priority control-plane traffic. Configuring CoPP for OSPFv3 You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRPv3, BGPv6, and ICMPv6.
PAGE 238
Viewing Queue Rates Example of Viewing Queue Rates Dell#show cpu-queue rate cp Service-Queue Rate (PPS) -------------- ----------Q0 1300 Q1 300 Q2 300 Q3 300 Q4 2000 Q5 400 Q6 400 Q7 1100 Dell# Example of Viewing Queue Mapping To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
PAGE 239
Dell# Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 239
PAGE 240
12 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
PAGE 241
The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
PAGE 242
Option Number and Description User Port Stacking Option 230 Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet. Assign an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network. When a client joins a network: 1 The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers.
PAGE 243
Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
PAGE 244
Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation Automatic address allocation is an address assignment method by which the DHCP server leases an IP address to a client from a pool of available addresses. An address pool is a range of IP addresses that the DHCP server may assign. The subnet number indexes the address pools. To create an address pool, follow these steps. 1 Access the DHCP server CLI context. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp server 2 Create an address pool and give it a name.
PAGE 245
Excluding Addresses from the Address Pool The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP address pool are available for assigning to DHCP clients. You must specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. To exclude an address, follow this step. • Exclude an address range from DHCP assignment. The exclusion applies to all configured pools. DHCP mode excluded-address Specifying an Address Lease Time To specify an address lease time, use the following command.
PAGE 246
Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution Windows internet naming service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a group of networks. Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four types of NetBIOS nodes: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. 1 Specify the NetBIOS WINS name servers, in order of preference, that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
PAGE 247
Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. • Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding • Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ip address Configure the System to be a Relay Agent DHCP clients and servers request and offer configuration information via broadcast DHCP messages.
PAGE 248
Figure 29. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int gigabitethernet 1/3 GigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
PAGE 249
Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch.
PAGE 250
To enable acquiring a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server on an interface configured with a static IP address, use the ip address dhcp command. A prompt displays to confirm the IP address reconfiguration. If you confirm, the statically configured IP address is released. An error message displays if you enter the release dhcp or renew dhcp commands. To renew the lease time of the dynamically acquired IP, use the renew dhcp command on an interface already configured with a dynamic IP address.
PAGE 251
• ip route for 0.0.0.0 takes precedence if it is present or added later. • Management routes added by a DHCP client display with Route Source as DHCP in the show ip management route and show ip management-route dynamic command output. • Management routes added by DHCP are automatically reinstalled if you configure a static IP route with the ip route command that replaces a management route added by the DHCP client.
PAGE 252
DHCP Server A switch can operate as a DHCP client and a DHCP server. DHCP client interfaces cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from the DHCP server running on the switch. Acquire a dynamic IP address from another DHCP server. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Do not enable the DHCP client on an interface and set the priority to 255 or assign the same DHCP interface IP address to a VRRP virtual group. Doing so guarantees that this router becomes the VRRP group owner.
PAGE 253
• track the number of address requests per relay agent. Restricting the number of addresses available per relay agent can harden a server against address exhaustion attacks. • associate client MAC addresses with a relay agent to prevent offering an IP address to a client spoofing the same MAC address on a different relay agent. • assign IP addresses according to the relay agent. This prevents generating DHCP offers in response to requests from an unauthorized relay agent.
PAGE 254
Enabling DHCP Snooping To enable DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1 Enable DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping 2 Specify ports connected to DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode INTERFACE PORT EXTENDER mode ip dhcp snooping trust 3 Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1 Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally.
PAGE 255
ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interfacetype | interface-number lease value Clearing the Binding Table To clear the binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ip dhcp snooping binding Clearing the DHCP IPv6 Binding Table To clear the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table.
PAGE 256
Displaying the Contents of the DHCPv6 Binding Table To display the contents of the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 dhcp snooping biniding Example of the show ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Command View the DHCP snooping statistics with the show ipv6 dhcp snooping command.
PAGE 257
================================================================ 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 172800 D Vl 10 Gi 1/2 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 172800 D Vl 10 Gi 1/1 10.1.1.253 00:00:4d:57:f8:e8 172740 D Vl 10 Gi 1/3 10.1.1.254 00:00:4d:69:e8:f2 172740 D Vl 10 Gi 1/5 Total number of Entries in the table : 4 Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic address resolution protocol (ARP) inspection prevents ARP spoofing by forwarding only ARP frames that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 258
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection To enable dynamic ARP inspection, use the following commands. 1 Enable DHCP snooping. 2 Validate ARP frames against the DHCP snooping binding table. INTERFACE VLAN mode arp inspection Examples of Viewing the ARP Information To view entries in the ARP database, use the show arp inspection database command.
PAGE 259
Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 15. Three Types of Source Address Validation Source Address Validation Description IP Source Address Validation Prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
PAGE 260
DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
PAGE 261
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
PAGE 262
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features. To adjust the ExaScale behavior to match TeraScale, use the following command.
PAGE 263
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
PAGE 264
Gi 1/1 Gi 1/1 Up Up 36 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system.
PAGE 265
• Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles. CONFIGURATION mode link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold {percent} The range is from 1 to 90%. • The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. Viewing an ECMP Group NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network.
PAGE 266
14 FIPS Cryptography Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce. FIPS mode is also validated for numerous platforms to meet the FIPS-140-2 standard for a software-based cryptographic module. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell Networking platforms.
PAGE 267
Enabling FIPS Mode To enable or disable FIPS mode, use the console port. Secure the host attached to the console port against unauthorized access. Any attempts to enable or disable FIPS mode from a virtual terminal session are denied. When you enable FIPS mode, the following actions are taken: • If enabled, the SSH server is disabled. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed.
PAGE 268
Examples of the show fips status and show system Commands The following example shows the show fips status command. Dell#show fips status FIPS Mode : Enabled for the system using the show system command. The following example shows the show system command. Disabling FIPS Mode When you disable FIPS mode, the following changes occur: • The SSH server disables. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, close.
PAGE 269
15 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
PAGE 270
The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node. Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring.
PAGE 271
Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology. A switch can act as a Master node for one FRRP group and a Transit for another FRRP group, or it can be a Transit node for both rings. In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups.
PAGE 272
• You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch. • One Master node per ring — all other nodes are Transit. • Each node has two member interfaces — primary and secondary. • There is no limit to the number of nodes on a ring. • Master node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • Transit node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • STP disabled on ring interfaces.
PAGE 273
Concept Explanation Ring Health-Check Frame (RHF) The Master node generates two types of RHFs. RHFs never loop the ring because they terminate at the Master node’s secondary port. • Hello RHF (HRHF) — These frames are processed only on the Master node’s Secondary port. The Transit nodes pass the HRHF through without processing it. An HRHF is sent at every Hello interval. • Topology Change RHF (TCRHF) — These frames contains ring status, keepalive, and the control and member VLAN hash.
PAGE 274
Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
PAGE 275
6 Enable FRRP. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
PAGE 276
CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds • Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500). • Dead-Interval: the range is from 50 to 6000, in increments of 50 (default is 1500).
PAGE 277
• Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. • Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. • There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. • You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only.
PAGE 278
! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary GigabitEthernet 2/31 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface GigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address sw
PAGE 279
Figure 31. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
PAGE 280
In the FRRP ring R2, the primary interface for VLT Node1 (transit node) is the VLTi. P1 is the secondary interface, which is an orphan port that is participating in the FRRP ring topology. V1 is the control VLAN through which the RFHs are exchanged indicating the health of the nodes and the FRRP ring itself. In addition to the control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M11 through Mn) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings.
PAGE 281
16 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
PAGE 282
• Configure GVRP Registration • Configure a GARP Timer • RPM Redundancy Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-byswitch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 33.
PAGE 283
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
PAGE 284
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
PAGE 285
• RPM Synchronization GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) 285
PAGE 286
17 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) is supported on Dell Networking OS. HA is a collection of features that preserves system continuity by maximizing uptime and minimizing packet loss during system disruptions. To support all the features within the HA collection, you should have the latest boot code. The following table lists the boot code requirements as of this Dell Networking OS release. Table 16. Boot Code Requirements Component Boot Code S3048–ON 1 2.0.
PAGE 287
Example of the show redundancy Command Dell#show redundancy -- Stack-unit Status ------------------------------------------------Mgmt ID: 0 Stack-unit ID: 0 Stack-unit Redundancy Role: Primary Stack-unit State: Active Stack-unit SW Version: 9.6(0.
PAGE 288
Example of the redundancy force-failover stack-unit Command Dell#redundancy force-failover stack-unit System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: yes Proceed with Stack-unit hot failover [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell# Specifying an Auto-Failover Limit When a non-recoverable fatal error is detected, an automatic failover occurs. However, Dell Networking OS is configured to auto-failover only three times within any 60 minute period. You may specify a different auto-failover count.
PAGE 289
Example of Viewing a Logical Configuration of a Pre-Configured Stack Unit After creating the logical stack unit, you can configure the interfaces on the stack unit as if it is present. Removing a Provisioned Logical Stack Unit To remove the line card configuration, use the following command.
PAGE 290
Software Resiliency During normal operations, Dell Networking OS monitors the health of both hardware and software components in the background to identify potential failures, even before these failures manifest. Software Component Health Monitoring On each of the line cards and the stack unit, there are a number of software components.
PAGE 291
System Log Event messages provide system administrators diagnostics and auditing information. Dell Networking OS sends event messages to the internal buffer, all terminal lines, the console, and optionally to a syslog server. For more information about event messages and configurable options, refer to Management. Hot-Lock Behavior Dell Networking OS hot-lock features allow you to append and delete their corresponding content addressable memory (CAM) entries dynamically without disrupting traffic.
PAGE 292
18 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
PAGE 293
leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP Querier. The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 34.
PAGE 294
3 Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism (refer to Adjusting Query and Response Timers). If no hosts respond (because there are none remaining in the group), the querier waits a specified period and sends another query. If it still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2.
PAGE 295
Figure 36. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
PAGE 296
Figure 37. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
PAGE 297
Figure 38. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
PAGE 298
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface GigabitEthernet 3/10 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
PAGE 299
EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell#show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet 1/1 225.1.2.1 GigabitEthernet 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.87.31.100 Adjusting Timers The following sections describe viewing and adjusting timers.
PAGE 300
Preventing a Host from Joining a Group You can prevent a host from joining a particular group by blocking specific IGMP reports using an extended access list containing the permissible source-group pairs. NOTE: For rules in IGMP access lists, source is the multicast source, not the source of the IGMP packet. For IGMPv2, use the keyword any for source (as shown in the following example) because the IGMPv2 hosts do not know in advance who the source is for the group in which they are interested.
PAGE 301
Figure 39. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 17. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 302
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 303
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
PAGE 304
• Disable snooping on a VLAN.
PAGE 305
Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router To statically specify or view a port in a VLAN, use the following commands. • Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp snooping mrouter • View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command.
PAGE 306
Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
PAGE 307
Table 18.
PAGE 308
NOTE: Egress Interface Selection (EIS) works only with IPv4 routing. When the feature is enabled using the management egress-interface-selection command, the following events are performed: • The CLI prompt changes to the EIS mode. • In this mode, you can run the application and no application commands • Applications can be configured or unconfigured as management applications using the application or no application command.
PAGE 309
• If the management port IP address is removed, the corresponding connected route is removed from both the EIS routing table and default routing table. • If a management route is deleted, then the route is removed from both the EIS routing table and default routing table.
PAGE 310
• ICMP-based applications like ping and traceroute are exceptions to the preceding logic since we do not have TCP/UDP port number. So if source IP address of the packet matches the management port IP address EIS route lookup is done. • Management application packet counter is incremented if EIS route lookup succeeds and packet is sent out of the management port. • If route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if the management port is down, then packets are dropped.
PAGE 311
Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic Transit Traffic is down or route lookup fails, packets are dropped Non-EIS management application Front-end default route will take higher precedence over management default route and SSH session to an unknown destination uses the front-end default route only. No change in the existing behavior.
PAGE 312
EIS Behavior for ICMP: ICMP packets do not have TCP/UDP ports. To do an EIS route lookup for ICMP-based applications (ping and traceroute) using the source ip option, the management port IP address should be specified as the source IP address. If management port is down or route lookup fails, packets are dropped. Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected. Table 20.
PAGE 313
Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected. Table 21.
PAGE 314
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 315
19 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 1 Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 316
• VLAN Interfaces • Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-Pipes • Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces • View Advanced Interface Information • Configuring the Traffic S
PAGE 317
NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and Dell Networking OS returns to the command prompt. NOTE: The CLI output may be incorrectly displayed as 0 (zero) for the Rx/Tx power values. To obtain the correct power information, perform a simple network management protocol (SNMP) query. Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the configuration and status information for one interface.
PAGE 318
interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet no ip address shutdown 2/6 2/7 2/8 2/9 Resetting an Interface to its Factory Default State You can reset the configurations applied on an interface to its factory default state. To reset the configuration, perform the following steps: 1 View the configurations applied on an interface.
PAGE 319
interface interface 2 • For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown To confirm that the interface is enabled, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. To leave INTERFACE mode, use the exit command or end command. You cannot delete a physical interface.
PAGE 320
show interfaces eee statistics show interfaces interface-type slot/port eee statistics show interfaces interface-type slot/port-range eee statistics • List the hardware counters on a specified interface or a specified stack unit. EXEC mode EXEC PRIVILEGE mode show hardware counters interface-type slot/port show hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number unit unit-number counters Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the status information for all the interfaces.
PAGE 321
S3048–ON Dell#show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/1 eee statistics Port EEE LPI TxLPIEventCount TxLPIDuration Gi 1/1 Yes Yes 0 0 RxLPIEventCount RxLPIDuration 0 0 The following example shows the hardware counters on a specified interface.
PAGE 322
TX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter TX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter TX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter TX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter TX - Good Packet Counter TX - Packet/Frame Counter TX - Unicast Frame Counter TX - Multicast Frame Counter TX - Broadcast Frame Counter TX - Byte Counter TX - Control Frame Counter TX - Pause Control Frame Counter TX - Oversized Frame Counter TX - Jabber Counter TX - VLAN Tag Frame Counter TX - Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter TX - RUNT Frame Counter TX -
PAGE 323
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabber Frame Counter VLAN Tag Frame Counter Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter VLAN Tagged Packets Ingress Dropped Packet MTU Check Error Frame Counter PFC Frame Priority 0 PFC Frame Priority 1 PF
PAGE 324
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 Debug Counter 9 Debug Counter 10 Debug Counter 11 EEE LPI Event Counter EEE LPI Duration Counter 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 <> Clear EEE Counters To clear the EEE counters, use the following the commands. • Clear the EEE counters on all the copper ports. EXEC Privilege mode • clear counters eee Clear the EEE counters on the specified port.
PAGE 325
• Overview of Layer Modes • Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode • Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode • Management Interfaces • Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces • Adjusting the Keepalive Timer • Clearing Interface Counters Overview of Layer Modes On all systems running Dell Networking OS, you can place physical interfaces, port channels, and VLANs in Layer 2 mode or Layer 3 mode. By default, VLANs are in Layer 2 mode. Table 23.
PAGE 326
Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode.
PAGE 327
• Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx). Add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. Example of the show ip interface Command You can only configure one primary IP address per interface.
PAGE 328
To enable and configure EIS, use the following commands: 1 Enter EIS mode. CONFIGURATION mode management egress-interface-selection 2 Configure which applications uses EIS.
PAGE 329
• IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces: • across a platform must be in the same subnet. • must not match the virtual IP address and must not be in the same subnet as the virtual IP. Dell#show interfaces managementethernet 1/1 ManagementEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellForce10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:a0:bf:f3 Current address is 00:01:e8:a0:bf:f3 Pluggable media not present Interface index is 302006472 Internet address is 10.16.130.
PAGE 330
• Configure an IP address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • The interface is the management interface. INTEFACE mode description Example of the show interface and show ip route Commands To display the configuration for a given port, use the show interface command in EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the following example. To display the routing table, use the show ip route command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 331
To assign an IP address to an interface, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] • ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash format (/24). • secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses.
PAGE 332
The only configurable command in INTERFACE mode of the Null interface is the ip unreachable command. Port Channel Interfaces Port channel interfaces support link aggregation, as described in IEEE Standard 802.3ad. This section covers the following topics: • Port Channel Definition and Standards • Port Channel Benefits • Port Channel Implementation • Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces Port Channel Definition and Standards Link aggregation is defined by IEEE 802.
PAGE 333
Port channels can contain a mix of 1G/10G/40G. The interface speed that the port channel uses is determined by the first port channel member that is physically up. Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that do not match the interface speed that the first channel member sets. That first interface may be either the interface that is physically brought up first or was physically operating when interfaces were added to the port channel.
PAGE 334
interface port-channel id-number 2 Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode. To place the port channel in Layer 2 mode or configure an IP address to place the port channel in Layer 3 mode, use the switchport command. You can configure a port channel as you would a physical interface by enabling or configuring protocols or assigning access control lists.
PAGE 335
2 L2L3 Dell# up 00:06:03 Gi Gi Gi Gi 1/7 (Up) * 1/8 (Up) 1/13 (Up) 1/14 (Up) The following example shows the port channel’s mode (L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2-port channel assigned to a routed VLAN), the status, and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel. Dell>show interface port-channel 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
PAGE 336
To reassign an interface to a new port channel, use the following commands. 1 Remove the interface from the first port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no channel-member interface 2 Change to the second port channel INTERFACE mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode interface port-channel id number 3 Add the interface to the second port channel.
PAGE 337
Adding or Removing a Port Channel from a VLAN As with other interfaces, you can add Layer 2 port channel interfaces to VLANs. To add a port channel to a VLAN, place the port channel in Layer 2 mode (by using the switchport command). To add or remove a VLAN port channel and to view VLAN port channel members, use the following commands. • Add the port channel to the VLAN as a tagged interface.
PAGE 338
G - GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: GigabitEthernet 1/1 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Q Vlans T 2-5,100,4010 Dell# Assigning an IP Address to a Port Channel You can assign an IP address to a port channel and use port channels in Layer 3 routing protocols. To assign an IP address, use the following command. • Configure an IP address and mask on the interface.
PAGE 339
Changing the Hash Algorithm The load-balance command selects the hash criteria applied to port channels. If you do not obtain even distribution with the load-balance command, you can use the hash-algorithm command to select the hash scheme for LAG, ECMP and NH-ECMP. You can rotate or shift the 12–bit Lag Hash until the desired hash is achieved. The nh-ecmp option allows you to change the hash value for recursive ECMP routes independently of non-recursive ECMP routes.
PAGE 340
• xor8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 • xor16 — uses 16 bit XOR. Bulk Configuration Bulk configuration allows you to determine if interfaces are present for physical interfaces or configured for logical interfaces. Interface Range An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range.
PAGE 341
Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range. Example of the interface range Command (Single Range) Dell(config)# interface range gigabitethernet 1/1 - 1/23 Dell(config-if-range-gi-1/1-1/23)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-gi-1/1-1/23)# Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range.
PAGE 342
Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range. Example of Adding VLAN and Port-Channel Interface Ranges Dell(config-if-range-gi-1/1-1/2)# interface range Vlan 2 – 100 , Port 1 – 25 Dell(config-if-range-gi-1/1-1/2-vl-2-100-po-1-25)# no shutdown Defining Interface Range Macros You can define an interface-range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration.
PAGE 343
• For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Example of the monitor interface Command The information displays in a continuous run, refreshing every 2 seconds by default. To manage the output, use the following keys.
PAGE 344
NOTE: TDR is an intrusive test. Do not run TDR on a link that is up and passing traffic. To test and display TDR results, use the following commands. 1 To test for cable faults on the TenGigabitEthernet cable. EXEC Privilege mode tdr-cable-test tengigabitethernet slot/port Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2 Displays TDR test results.
PAGE 345
Important Points to Remember • Link dampening is not supported on VLAN interfaces. • Link dampening is disabled when the interface is configured for port monitoring. • You can apply link dampening to Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces. • You can configure link dampening on individual interfaces in a LAG. Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. • Enable link dampening.
PAGE 346
Example of the clear dampening Command Dell# clear dampening interface Gi 1/1 Dell#show interfaces dampening Gigabitethernet 1/1 Interface Supp Flaps Penalty Half-Life Reuse State Gi 1/1 Up 0 0 1 2 Dell# Suppress Max-Sup 3 4 Link Dampening Support for XML View the output of the following show commands in XML by adding | display xml to the end of the command.
PAGE 347
link-bundle-monitor enable Dell(conf-if-po-10)#link-bundle-monitor enable • Configure threshold level for link bundle monitoring. link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold Dell(conf)#link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold • View the link bundle monitoring status. show link-bundle-distribution Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Ethernet pause frames and threshold settings are supported on the Dell Networking OS. Ethernet Pause Frames allow for a temporary stop in data transmission.
PAGE 348
Enabling Pause Frames Enable Ethernet pause frames flow control on all ports on a chassis or a line card. If not, the system may exhibit unpredictable behavior. NOTE: Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output. As a workaround, apply the new settings, execute shut then no shut on the interface, and then check the running-config of the port. NOTE: If you disable rx flow control, Dell Networking recommends rebooting the system.
PAGE 349
• The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. VLANs: • All members of a VLAN must have the same IP MTU value. • Members can have different Link MTU values.
PAGE 350
4 Access the port. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-type 5 Set the local port speed. INTERFACE mode speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto} NOTE: If you use an active optical cable (AOC), you can convert the QSFP+ port to a 10 Gigabit SFP+ port or 1 Gigabit SFP port. You can use the speed command to enable the required speed. 6 Disable auto-negotiation on the port. INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto If the speed was set to 1000, do not disable auto-negotiation. 7 Verify configuration changes.
PAGE 351
Set Auto-Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master/ forced slave once autonegotiation is enabled. CAUTION: Ensure that only one end of the node is configured as forced-master and the other is configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is, both as forced-master or both as forced-slave), the show interface command flaps between an auto-neg-error and forced-master/slave states.
PAGE 352
Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show ip interface configured ip interface stack-unit 1 configured ip interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured ip interface br configured ip interface br stack-unit 1 configured ip interface br tengigabitEthernet 1 configured running-config interfaces configured running-config interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured In EXEC mode, the show interfaces switchport command displays only interfaces in Layer 2 mode and their relevant co
PAGE 353
Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.
PAGE 354
Description: interface tengig 10/0 Hardware is DellEth, address is 34:17:eb:01:20:f3 Current address is 34:17:eb:01:20:f3 Pluggable media present, SFP+ type is 10GBASE-SR Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 850nm SFP+ receive power reading is -36.
PAGE 355
Dynamic Counters By default, counting is enabled for IPFLOW, IPACL, L2ACL, L2FIB. For the remaining applications, Dell Networking OS automatically turns on counting when you enable the application, and is turned off when you disable the application. NOTE: If you enable more than four counter-dependent applications on a port pipe, there is an impact on line rate performance.
PAGE 356
Example of the clear counters Command When you enter this command, confirm that you want Dell Networking OS to clear the interface counters for that interface.
PAGE 357
20 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel. • Transport mode — (default) Use to encrypt only the payload of the packet. Routing information is unchanged.
PAGE 358
crypto ipsec policy myCryptoPolicy 10 ipsec-manual transform-set myXform-set session-key inbound esp 256 auth encrypt session-key outbound esp 257 auth encrypt match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 23 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 3 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 4 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 match 5 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 23 1.1.1.2 /32 0 match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.
PAGE 359
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 360
• Configuring a Broadcast Address • Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
PAGE 361
2 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enable the interface.
PAGE 362
• tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. Dell#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.0/24 Direct, Nu 0 S 6.1.2.0/24 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.2/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.3/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.4/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.5/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.6/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.7/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.8/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.9/32 via 6.1.20.
PAGE 363
IPv4 Path MTU Discovery Overview The size of the packet that can be sent across each hop in the network path without being fragmented is called the path maximum transmission unit (PMTU). This value might vary for the same route between two devices, mainly over a public network, depending on the network load and speed, and it is not a consistent value. The MTU size can also be different for various types of traffic sent from one host to the same endpoint.
PAGE 364
Configuring the Duration to Establish a TCP Connection You can configure the duration for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection. Using this capability, you can limit the wait times for TCP connection requests.
PAGE 365
The following sections describe DNS and the resolution of host names. • Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names • Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains • Configuring DNS with Traceroute Name server, Domain name, and Domain list are VRF specific. The maximum number of Name servers and Domain lists per VRF is six. Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands.
PAGE 366
ip domain-list name Configure this command up to six times to specify a list of possible domain names. Dell Networking OS searches the domain names in the order they were configured until a match is found or the list is exhausted. Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup • Specify up to six name servers.
PAGE 367
For more information about Proxy ARP, refer to RFC 925, Multi-LAN Address Resolution, and RFC 1027, Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways. Configuration Tasks for ARP For a complete listing of all ARP-related commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 368
Clearing ARP Cache To clear the ARP cache of dynamically learnt ARP information, use the following command. • Clear the ARP caches for all interfaces or for a specific interface by entering the following information. EXEC privilege clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] • ip ip-address (OPTIONAL): enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. • no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
PAGE 369
Figure 40. ARP Learning via ARP Request Beginning with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when you enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system installs a new ARP entry, or updates an existing entry for all received ARP requests. Figure 41. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP.
PAGE 370
CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP. EXEC Privilege mode show arp retries ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet.
PAGE 371
Important Points to Remember • The existing ip directed broadcast command is rendered meaningless if you enable UDP helper on the same interface. • The broadcast traffic rate should not exceed 200 packets per second when you enable UDP helper. • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports.
PAGE 372
Internet address is 1.1.0.1/24 IP UDP-Broadcast address is 1.1.255.
PAGE 373
Figure 42. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
PAGE 374
Figure 44. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. • If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
PAGE 375
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
PAGE 376
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
PAGE 377
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
PAGE 378
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
PAGE 379
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
PAGE 380
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
PAGE 381
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
PAGE 382
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S3048–ON IS-IS for IPv6 support for redistribution 9.7.(0.1) Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 9.7.(0.1) OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 9.7.(0.1) Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 9.7.(0.
PAGE 383
• Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
PAGE 384
With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes. With NDP, each node sends a request only to the intended destination via a multicast address with the unicast address used as the last 24 bits. Other hosts on the link do not participate in the process, greatly increasing network bandwidth efficiency. Figure 47.
PAGE 385
The DNS server address does not allow the following: • link local addresses • loopback addresses • prefix addresses • multicast addresses • invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed. Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
PAGE 386
Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information To display IPv6 interface information, including IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show ipv6 interface command in EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode. Examples of Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information The following example displays IPv6 RDNSS information. The output in the last 3 lines indicates that the IPv6 RDNSS was correctly configured on interface te 1/1.
PAGE 387
Configuration Tasks for IPv6 The following are configuration tasks for the IPv6 protocol. • Adjusting Your CAM-Profile • Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface • Assigning a Static IPv6 Route • Configuring Telnet with IPv6 • SNMP over IPv6 • Showing IPv6 Information • Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks.
PAGE 388
The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in Dell Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully. To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the ipv6 address command.
PAGE 389
Configuring Telnet with IPv6 The Telnet client and server in Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. NOTE: Telnet to link local addresses is supported on the system. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device. EXEC mode or EXEC Privileged mode telnet [vrf vrf-name] ipv6 address • ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x • mask: prefix length is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 390
prefix-list route rpf Dell# List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show ipv6 interface interface {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: • For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief.
PAGE 391
show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] type The following keywords are available: • To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). • To display information about a host, enter hostname. • To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all. • To display information about all connected IPv6 routes, enter connected. • To display information about brief summary of all IPv6 routes, enter summary.
PAGE 392
Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show running-config interface type {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: • For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 393
3 Create the policy. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name 4 Define the role of the device attached to the port. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode device-role {host | router} Use the keyword host to set the device role as host. Use the keyword router to set the device role as router. 5 Set the hop count limit. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode hop-limit {maximum | minimum limit} The hop limit range is from 0 to 254. 6 Set the managed address configuration flag.
PAGE 394
The reachability time range is from 0 to 3,600,000 milliseconds. 14 Set the advertised retransmission time. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode retrans—timer value The retransmission time range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. 15 Display the configurations applied on the RA guard policy mode.
PAGE 395
Interfaces : Gi 1/1 Dell# Monitoring IPv6 RA Guard To debug IPv6 RA guard, use the following command. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 nd ra-guard [interface slot/port | count value] The count range is from 1 to 65534. The default is infinity. For a complete listing of all commands related to IPv6 RA Guard, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 396
23 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
PAGE 397
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 48.
PAGE 398
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
PAGE 399
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
PAGE 400
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debuging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
PAGE 401
4 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface.
PAGE 402
Accept wide metrics: Dell# none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 403
4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
PAGE 404
• adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. • manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Examples of the show isis graceful-restart detail Command NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
PAGE 405
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 Dell# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
PAGE 406
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
PAGE 407
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
PAGE 408
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
PAGE 409
• For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table.
PAGE 410
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
PAGE 411
Configure the following parameters: • • level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. • metric-value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • metric-type: choose either external or internal. The default is internal. • map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.
PAGE 412
• map-name: name of a configured route map. To view the IS-IS configuration globally (including both IPv4 and IPv6 settings), use the show running-config isis command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the current IPv4 IS-IS configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. To view the current IPv6 IS-IS configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS-ADDRESS FAMILY IPV6 mode.
PAGE 413
Example of Viewing the Overload Bit Setting When the bit is set, a 1 is placed in the OL column in the show isis database command output. The overload bit is set in both the Level-1 and Level-2 database because the IS type for the router is Level-1-2. Dell#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
PAGE 414
debug isis update-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. Dell Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode. To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command.
PAGE 415
Maximum Values in the Routing Table IS-IS metric styles support different cost ranges for the route. The cost range for the narrow metric style is 0 to 1023, while all other metric styles support a range of 0 to 0xFE000000. Change the IS-IS Metric Style in One Level Only By default, the IS-IS metric style is narrow. When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value (configured with the isis metric command) could be affected.
PAGE 416
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value narrow transition transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only).
PAGE 417
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition truncated value narrow transition wide original value narrow transition narrow original value narrow transition wide transition original value narrow transition transition original value transition wide original value transition narrow original value transition wide transition original value transition narrow transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow
PAGE 418
Figure 49. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-gi-3/17)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.
PAGE 419
exit-address-family Dell (conf-router_isis)# Dell (conf-if-gi-3/17)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-gi-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
PAGE 420
24 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
PAGE 421
LACP Modes Dell Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
PAGE 422
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
PAGE 423
Dell(conf)#interface Gigabitethernet 4/15 Dell(conf-if-gi-4/15)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-4/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-gi-4/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
PAGE 424
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
PAGE 425
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group Dell#config Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. Dell#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
PAGE 426
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
PAGE 427
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 1000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
PAGE 428
Figure 53.
PAGE 429
Figure 54.
PAGE 430
Figure 55.
PAGE 431
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int gig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(con
PAGE 432
Figure 56.
PAGE 433
Figure 57.
PAGE 434
Figure 58. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
PAGE 435
25 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
PAGE 436
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
PAGE 437
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
PAGE 438
converted to sticky MACs on that interface. To remove all sticky MAC addresses from the running config file, disable sticky MAC and use the write config command. When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages.
PAGE 439
learn-limit-violation shutdown Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move.
PAGE 440
Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs. To disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs, follow this procedure: • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lacp Disable source MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lldp Disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
PAGE 441
NOTE: If you have configured the no mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp command, traffic continues to be forwarded to the failed NIC until the ARP entry on the switch times out. Figure 60.
PAGE 442
Figure 61. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
PAGE 443
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs • • • • You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. The active or backup interface may not be a member of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them.
PAGE 444
Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Dell# Dell#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Status Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Standby Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 Active Dell# Dell(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface gigabitethernet 1/2 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WARN:
PAGE 445
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
PAGE 446
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
PAGE 447
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
PAGE 448
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Gi 4/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown Dell#debug fefd packets Dell#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Gi 1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Gi 4/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info
PAGE 449
26 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
PAGE 450
Table 32. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
PAGE 451
Figure 65. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 33. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
PAGE 452
Type TLV Description LLDP, but is available and mandatory (nonconfigurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell Networking supports the LLDP-MED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only. 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether it is currently in a LAG, and the port identification of the LAG.
PAGE 453
Type SubType TLV Description • • • whether the transmitting device supports LLDP-MED what LLDP-MED TLVs it supports LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value. 127 3 Location Identification Indicates that the physical location of the device expressed in one of three possible formats: • • • 127 4 Inventory Management TLVs Implementation of this set of TLVs is optional in LLDP-MED devices. None or all TLVs must be supported.
PAGE 454
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). • The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
PAGE 455
• VLAN ID • VLAN tagged or untagged status • Layer 2 priority • DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined. An individual LLDP-MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the Dell Networking OS CLI (Advertising TLVs).
PAGE 456
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
PAGE 457
LLDP Compatibility • Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. • 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. • Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
PAGE 458
Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2 Enter LLDP management-interface mode.
PAGE 459
To advertise TLVs, use the following commands. 1 Enter LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. • For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id vlan-name. • For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
PAGE 460
Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Examples of Viewing LLDP Configurations The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
PAGE 461
Local Interface Gi 1/4 has 1 neighbor Total Frames Out: 6547 Total Frames In: 4136 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 0 Total TLVs Discarded: 0 Next packet will be sent after 7 seconds The neighbors are given below: ----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 00:01:e8:06:95:3e Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: GigabitEth
PAGE 462
R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode After you enable LLDP, the system transmits and receives LLDPDUs by default. To configure the system to transmit or receive only and return to the default, use the following commands. • Transmit only.
PAGE 463
• Adjust the TTL value. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode. multiplier • Return to the default multiplier value. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode.
PAGE 464
Figure 70. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 38.
PAGE 465
MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description Basic TLV Selection mibBasicTLVsTxEnable lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports. mibMgmtAddrInstanceTxEnable lldpManAddrPortsTxEnable The management addresses defined for the system and the ports through which they are enabled for transmission.
PAGE 466
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object 7 System Capabilities system capabilities Local lldpLocSysCapSupported Remote lldpRemSysCapSupported Local lldpLocSysCapEnabled Remote lldpRemSysCapEnabled Local lldpLocManAddrLen Remote lldpRemManAddrLen Local lldpLocManAddrSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrSubtype Local lldpLocManAddr Remote lldpRemManAddr Local lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local
PAGE 467
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object VLAN name Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 41.
PAGE 468
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source System LLDP-MED MIB Object Remote lldpXMedRemLocationSubt ype Local lldpXMedLocLocationInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocationInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoEDeviceT ype Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEDeviceT ype Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPow erSource lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rSource Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werSource lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erSource Power Priority Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rPriority
PAGE 469
27 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 470
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
PAGE 471
• Enter the ip vlan-flooding command to specify that all Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going through a VLAN member port floods across all the member ports of that VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
PAGE 472
28 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
PAGE 473
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 72.
PAGE 474
to a different RP, a method is needed for the RPs to exchange information about active sources. This information exchange is done with MSDP. With Anycast RP, all the RPs are configured to be MSDP peers of each other. When a source registers with one RP, an SA message is sent to the other RPs informing them that there is an active source for a particular multicast group. The result is that each RP is aware of the active sources in the area of the other RPs.
PAGE 475
Figure 73.
PAGE 476
Figure 74.
PAGE 477
Figure 75.
PAGE 478
Figure 76. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 479
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
PAGE 480
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
PAGE 481
Figure 77.
PAGE 482
Figure 78.
PAGE 483
Figure 79. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
PAGE 484
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.
PAGE 485
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
PAGE 486
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
PAGE 487
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
PAGE 488
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
PAGE 489
Figure 80. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
PAGE 490
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
PAGE 491
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 492
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface GigabitEthernet 3/41 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
PAGE 493
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
PAGE 494
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
PAGE 495
29 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
PAGE 496
• Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally • Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking O
PAGE 497
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
PAGE 498
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
PAGE 499
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.384 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e806.953e Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 500
Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name • Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number Example of the name Command To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 501
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3 Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4 Change the max-hops parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
PAGE 502
Port Cost Default Value 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1700 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1400 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces 180000 Port Channel with 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 18000 Port Channel with 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1800 Port Channel with 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 Port Channel with 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 180
PAGE 503
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
PAGE 504
Figure 82. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 505
interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 506
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface GigabitEthernet 3/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown SFTOS Example Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally
PAGE 507
interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode • debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
PAGE 508
Dell# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Gi 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, CIST Port Id: 128:470 Msg Age: 0, Max Age: 20, Hello: 2, Fwd Delay: 15, Ver1 Len: 0, Ver3 Len: 96 Name: Tahiti, Rev: 123, Int Root Path Cost: 0 Rem Hops: 20, Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e 4w0d4h : INST 1: Flags: 0x6e, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e806.
PAGE 509
30 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
PAGE 510
Protocol Ethernet Address 01:00:5e:00:00:06 RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast Policies The Dell Networking OS supports multicast features for IPv4.
PAGE 511
ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
PAGE 512
Figure 83. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 44. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 513
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 514
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Preventing a Source from Registering with the RP To prevent the PIM source DR from sending register packets to route processor (RP) for the specified multicast source and group, use the following command.
PAGE 515
Figure 84. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 45. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 516
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 517
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
PAGE 518
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
PAGE 519
• Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
PAGE 520
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 47.
PAGE 521
Scenario Output -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
PAGE 522
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
PAGE 523
Scenario Output -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
PAGE 524
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------- If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
PAGE 525
Scenario Output such a scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
PAGE 526
31 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
PAGE 527
Figure 85. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
PAGE 528
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
PAGE 529
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
PAGE 530
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds.
PAGE 531
For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address. • The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table.
PAGE 532
Interface GigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/IPv6 route.
PAGE 533
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535.
PAGE 534
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: Dell(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Dell(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 Dell(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters Dell(conf-track-105)#end Dell#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Tracking a Metric Threshold Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the met
PAGE 535
threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold. 6 (Optional) Display the tracking configuration.
PAGE 536
First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is GigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP GigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface GigabitEthernet 1/4 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes, last change 00:03:30 Tracked by: Example of the show track brief Command Router# show track brief ResId State 1 Resource LastChange IP route reach
PAGE 537
32 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
PAGE 538
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 86. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 539
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
PAGE 540
Figure 87. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
PAGE 541
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
PAGE 542
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
PAGE 543
Figure 88. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 16,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
PAGE 544
Graceful Restart When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
PAGE 545
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
PAGE 546
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). Dell(conf)#int gigabitethernet 2/2 Dell(conf-if-gi-2/2)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 Dell(conf-if-gi-2/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 Dell(conf-if-gi-2/2)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
PAGE 547
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
PAGE 548
The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
PAGE 549
• Enable OSPFv2 on an interface and assign a network address range to a specific OSPF area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface.
PAGE 550
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 13.1.1.1, Interface address 10.2.3.2 Backup Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.3.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) Dell> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process.
PAGE 551
area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area. Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id database-summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.100) (Process ID 34) Area 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
PAGE 552
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 GigabitEthernet 2/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
PAGE 553
Dell#(conf)#ex Dell##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.2 Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 Dell# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces.
PAGE 554
• • number: the range is from 0 to 255 (the default is 1). Change the retransmission interval between LSAs. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds • • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the wait period between link state update packets sent out the interface.
PAGE 555
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type. When you configure the auth-change-wait-time, OSPF sends out only the old authentication scheme until the wait timer expires. After the wait timer expires, OSPF sends only the new authentication scheme.
PAGE 556
• Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role. To disable OSPFv2 graceful-restart after you have enabled it, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command in CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode.
PAGE 557
CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | isis | rip | static] Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process.
PAGE 558
• Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show interfaces • show protocols • debug IP OSPF events and/or packets • show neighbors • show routes To help troubleshoot OSPFv2, use the following commands. • View the summary of all OSPF process IDs enables on the router. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config ospf • View the summary information of the IP routes.
PAGE 559
router-id 10.10.10.10 Dell# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology.
PAGE 560
network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.
PAGE 561
NOTE: To set the interval time between the reception of topology changes and calculation of SPF in milli seconds, use the timers spf delay holdtime msec command.
PAGE 562
The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2 Bring up the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode no shutdown Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area. Additionally, the command creates the OSPFv3 process with ID on the router.
PAGE 563
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID}} • The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
PAGE 564
Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. • For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 565
Enabling OSPFv3 Graceful Restart Follow the procedure in this section to configure graceful restart for OSPFv3. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. . By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
PAGE 566
EXEC Privilege mode • show run ospf Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Examples of the Graceful Restart show Commands The following example shows the show run ospf command.
PAGE 567
LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Gi 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers.
PAGE 568
• You can only enable one security protocol (AH or ESP) at a time on an interface or for an area. Enable IPsec AH with the ipv6 ospf authentication command; enable IPsec ESP with the ipv6 ospf encryption command. • The security policy configured for an area is inherited by default on all interfaces in the area. • The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned.
PAGE 569
• • key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Remove an IPsec authentication policy from an interface.
PAGE 570
Configuring IPSec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPSec authentication for an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)). The security policy index (SPI) value must be unique to one IPSec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
PAGE 571
area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-authentication-type] key • • • area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. • spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. • esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
PAGE 572
Policy refcount Inbound ESP SPI Outbound ESP SPI Inbound ESP Auth Key Outbound ESP Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key Outbound ESP Cipher Key Transform set : : : : : : : : 1 502 (0x1F6) 502 (0x1F6) 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH K
PAGE 573
transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios.
PAGE 574
• For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 575
33 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
PAGE 576
• • Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • • • • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
PAGE 577
The Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers. Never apply the permit statement because the redirect list covers all source and destination IP addresses. ip redirect-list rcl0 seq 5 redirect 2.2.2.2 ip any any seq 10 permit ip host 3.3.3.
PAGE 578
• FORMAT: slot/port • ip-protocol-number or protocol-type is the type of protocol to be redirected • FORMAT: 0-255 for IP protocol number, or enter protocol type • source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address • FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address • destination ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Destination’s IP address • FORMAT: A.B.C.D/NN, or ANY or HOST IP address To delete a rule, use the no redirect command.
PAGE 579
! ip redirect-list test seq 10 redirect 10.1.1.2 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any seq 15 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/25 any seq 20 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any Dell(conf-redirect-list)# NOTE: Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0), the use of multiple recursive routes with the same source-address and destination-address combination in a redirect policy on an router.
PAGE 580
show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name 2 View the redirect list entries programmed in the CAM. EXEC mode show cam pbr show cam-usage List the redirect list configuration using the show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name command. The non-contiguous mask displays in dotted format (x.x.x.x). The contiguous mask displays in /x format. Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
PAGE 581
06080 0 N/A IP 0x0 199.199.199.199 N/A NA 06081 0 N/A TCP 0x10 00:00:00:00:00:09 8/1 0 0 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 0 40 234.234.234.234 255.234.234.234 222.222.222.222/24 Sample Configuration You can use the following example configuration to set up a PBR. These are not comprehensive directions but are intended to give you a guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI.
PAGE 582
Create the Redirect-List GOLD Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 View Redirect-List GOLD Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Redirect IPs Create Track Objects to track the Redirect IPs: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#track 3 ip host 42.1.1.2 reachability Dell(conf-track-3)#probe icmp Dell(conf-track-3)#track 4 ip host 43.1.1.
PAGE 583
reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.144, Track 4 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) Applied interfaces: Te 2/28 Dell# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel mode ipip Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel keepalive 60.1.1.
PAGE 584
Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.
PAGE 585
34 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
PAGE 586
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
PAGE 587
ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2 Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
PAGE 588
Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 1/11 GigabitEthernet 2/13 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: GigabitEthernet 2/11, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: GigabitEthernet 1/11 GigabitEthernet 1/12 GigabitEthernet 2/13 --More-- Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds. You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries) or configure an expiry time for a particular entry.
PAGE 589
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 590
• Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode ip pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter. EXEC Privilege mode show ip pim interface Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
PAGE 591
35 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
PAGE 592
Configure PIM-SSM Configuring PIM-SSM is a two-step process. 1 Configure PIM-SSM. 2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
PAGE 593
To display the source to which a group is mapped, use the show ip igmp ssm-map [group] command. If you use the group option, the command displays the group-to-source mapping even if the group is not currently in the IGMP group table. If you do not specify the group option, the display is a list of groups currently in the IGMP group table that has a group-to-source mapping. To display the list of sources mapped to a group currently in the IGMP group table, use the show ip igmp groups group detail command.
PAGE 594
Electing an RP using the BSR Mechanism Every PIM router within a domain must map a particular multicast group address to the same RP. The group-to-RP mapping may be statically or dynamically configured. RFC 5059 specifies a dynamic, self-configuring method called the Bootstrap Router (BSR) mechanism, by which an RP is elected from a pool of RP candidates (C-RPs). Some routers within the domain are configured to be C-RPs.
PAGE 595
ip pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-Candidate interface [priority] [acl-name] The specified acl-list is associated to the rp-candidate. NOTE: You can create the ACL list of multicast prefix using the ip access-list standard command.
PAGE 596
36 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
PAGE 597
• Source port (MD) can be a VLAN, where the VLAN traffic received on that port pipe where its members are present is monitored • Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch.
PAGE 598
Example of Configuring Another Monitoring Session with a Previously Used Destination Port Dell(conf)#monitor session 300 Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)#$ destination gigabitethernet 1/4 direction tx Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)# Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Dest IP TTL Drop Rate Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ ---- --------------------- -------------- -----0 Te 1/50 Te 1/51 rx Port N/A N/A A No N/A N/A yes 1 Gi 1/45 Gi 1/46 tx Port N/A N/A
PAGE 599
Gig 6/2 direction tx, if the MD port Gig 6/1 is an untagged member of any VLAN, all monitored frames that the MG port Gig 6/2 receives are tagged with the VLAN ID of the MD port. Similarly, if BPDUs are transmitted, the MG port receives them tagged with the VLAN ID 4095. This behavior might result in a difference between the number of egress packets on the MD port and monitored packets on the MG port.
PAGE 600
Dell(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ---------------------------- --------0 Gi 1/1 Gi 1/2 rx A N/A No 0 Po 10 Gi 1/2 rx A N/A No 1 Vl 40 Gi 1/3 rx A N/A No Mode Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate ---- --------- -------- ---- --- ---- ---- Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ Port 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ Flow 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/ NOTE: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring.
PAGE 601
EXEC Privilege mode show run monitor session Dell#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 Dell# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
PAGE 602
Dell(conf)#do show monitor session 0 SessionID Source Destination Direction Mode Gre-Protocol FcMonitor --------- ------ ----------- --------- -------------- --------0 Gi 1/1 Te 1/2 rx interface A N/A yes Source IP Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate --------- -------- ---- --- ---- ---- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.
PAGE 603
Figure 92. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
PAGE 604
• The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN. • The member port of the reserved VLAN should have MTU and IPMTU value as MAX+4 (to hold the VLAN tag parameter). • To associate with source session, the reserved VLAN can have at max of only 4 member ports. • To associate with destination session, the reserved VLAN can have multiple member ports.
PAGE 605
• On a source switch on which you configure source ports for remote port mirroring, you can add only one port to the dedicated RPM VLAN which is used to transport mirrored traffic. You can configure multiple ports for the dedicated RPM VLAN on intermediate and destination switches. Displaying Remote-Port Mirroring Configurations To display the current configuration of remote port mirroring for a specified session, enter the show config command in MONITOR SESSION configuration mode.
PAGE 606
4 direction Specify rx, tx or both in case to monitor ingress/egress or both ingress and egress packets on the specified port.. 5 rpm source-ip dest-ip Specify the source ip address and the destination ip where the packet needs to be sent. 6 flow-based enable Specify flow-based enable for mirroring on a flow by flow basis and also for vlan as source. 7 no enable (Optional) No disable command is mandatory in order for a rpm session to be active.
PAGE 607
Dell#show monitor session SessID Source Destination ------ ---------------1 Gi 1/5 remote-vlan 10 2 Vl 100 remote-vlan 20 3 Po 10 remote-vlan 30 Dell# Dir --rx rx both Mode ---Port Flow Port Source IP --------N/A N/A N/A Dest IP -------N/A N/A N/A Configuring the sample Source Remote Port Mirroring Dell(conf)#inte gi 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#switchport Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#exit Dell(conf)#interface gi 1/2 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/2)#switchport Dell(conf-if-gi-1/2)#no shutdown
PAGE 608
1 Enable control plane egress acl using the following command: 2 Create an extended MAC access list and add a deny rule of (0x0180c2xxxxxx) packets using the following commands: mac control-plane egress-acl mac access-list extended mac2 seq 5 deny any 01:80:c2:00:00:00 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff count 3 Apply ACL on that RPM VLAN. In this example RPM vlan is 10.
PAGE 609
To configure an ERPM session: Table 50. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
PAGE 610
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/1-3 mac access-group flow in <<<<<<<<<<<<<< Only ingress packets are supported for mirroring shutdown ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 93.
PAGE 611
b • The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. In case of a packet with L3 VLAN, it would be 42 bytes long. The original payload /original mirrored data starts from the 39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. • Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e.
PAGE 612
as the VLTi link is added as an implicit member of the RPM vlan. As a result, the mirrored traffic also reaches the peer VLT device effecting VLTi link's bandwidth usage. To mitigate this issue, the L2 VLT egress mask drops the duplicate packets that egress out of the VLT port. If the LAG status of the peer VLT device is OPER-UP, then the other VLT peer blocks the transmission of packets received through VLTi to its port or LAG.
PAGE 613
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring Orphan Ports across VLT Devices — In this scenario, an orphan port on the primary VLT device is mirrored to another orphan port on the secondary VLT device through the ICL LAG. The port analyzer is connected to the secondary VLT device. No restrictions apply to the RPM session. The following example shows the configuration on the primary VLT device:source orphan port destination remote vlan direction rx/tx/both.
PAGE 614
37 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 615
• • A switch can have one or more primary VLANs, and it can have none. • A primary VLAN has one or more secondary VLANs. • A primary VLAN and each of its secondary VLANs decrement the available number of VLAN IDs in the switch. • A primary VLAN has one or more promiscuous ports. • A primary VLAN might have one or more trunk ports, or none. Secondary VLAN — a subdomain of the primary VLAN. • There are two types of secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN.
PAGE 616
• Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan | interface interface] • Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan mapping • Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
PAGE 617
• trunk (inter-switch PVLAN hub port) Example of the switchport mode private-vlan Command For interface details, refer to Enabling a Physical Interface in the Interfaces chapter. NOTE: You cannot add interfaces that are configured as PVLAN ports to regular VLANs. You also cannot add “regular” ports (ports not configured as PVLAN ports) to PVLANs. The following example shows the switchport mode private-vlan command on a port and on a port channel.
PAGE 618
Add PVLAN trunk ports to the VLAN only as tagged interfaces. You can enter interfaces in numeric or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add promiscuous ports or PVLAN trunk ports to the PVLAN (no host or regular ports). 6 (OPTIONAL) Assign an IP address to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip address ip address 7 (OPTIONAL) Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs.
PAGE 619
interface vlan vlan-id 2 Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3 Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4 Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add ports defined as host to the VLAN.
PAGE 620
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 94. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
PAGE 621
In parallel, on S4810: • Te 1/3 is a promiscuous port and Te 1/25 is a PVLAN trunk port, assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/4-6 are host ports. Te 1/4 and Te 1/5 are assigned to the community VLAN 4001, while Te 1/6 is assigned to the isolated VLAN 4003. The result is that: • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500.
PAGE 622
The following example shows using the show vlan private-vlan mapping command. S50-1#show vlan private-vlan mapping Private Vlan: Primary : 4000 Isolated : 4003 Community : 4001 NOTE: In the following example, notice the addition of the PVLAN codes – P, I, and C – in the left column. The following example shows viewing the VLAN status.
PAGE 623
38 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
PAGE 624
Table 52. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
PAGE 625
no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
PAGE 626
Figure 96. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
PAGE 627
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Gi 1/32 Port 375 (GigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 628
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
PAGE 629
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
PAGE 630
To keep both ports in a Forwarding state, use extend system ID. Extend system ID augments the bridge ID with a VLAN ID to differentiate BPDUs on each VLAN so that PVST+ does not detect a loop and both ports can remain in a Forwarding state. Figure 97. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID.
PAGE 631
tagged GigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface GigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 n
PAGE 632
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 3/12,22 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 632 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
PAGE 633
39 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 54.
PAGE 634
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 98.
PAGE 635
• Implementation Information • Port-Based QoS Configurations • Policy-Based QoS Configurations • DSCP Color Maps • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED • Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes • Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets • Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface • Applying DSCP and VL
PAGE 636
Table 55. dot1p-priority Values and Queue Numbers dot1p Queue Number 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface.
PAGE 637
When priority-tagged frames ingress an untagged port or hybrid port, the frames are classified to the default VLAN of the port and to a queue according to their dot1p priority if you configure service-class dynamic dotp or trust dot1p. When priority-tagged frames ingress a tagged port, the frames are dropped because, for a tagged port, the default VLAN is 0. Dell Networking OS Behavior: Hybrid ports can receive untagged, tagged, and priority tagged frames.
PAGE 638
Rate shaping buffers, rather than drops, traffic exceeding the specified rate until the buffer is exhausted. If any stream exceeds the configured bandwidth on a continuous basis, it can consume all of the buffer space that is allocated to the port. • Apply rate shaping to outgoing traffic on a port. INTERFACE mode rate shape • Apply rate shaping to a queue.
PAGE 639
Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them. Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL.
PAGE 640
Dell(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#service-policy input pmap Examples of Creating a Layer 3 IPv6 Class Map The following example matches IPv6 traffic with a DSCP value of 40. Dell(conf)# class-map match-all test Dell(conf-class-map)# match ipv6 dscp 40 The following example matches IPv4 and IPv6 traffic with a precedence value of 3.
PAGE 641
• Specify the order in which you want to apply ACL rules using the keyword order. order The order can range from 0 to 254. By default, all ACL rules have an order of 255. Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command.
PAGE 642
Index Flag Port Port Marking ------------------------------------------------------------------------20416 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.5/32 0.0.0.0/0 20 2 20417 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 10 1 20418 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.3/32 0.0.0.0/0 12 1 20419 1 10 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 14 1 24511 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0 Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic.
PAGE 643
Setting a dot1p Value for Egress Packets To set a dot1p value for egress packets, use the following command. • Set a dscp or dot1p value for egress packets. QOS-POLICY-IN mode set mac-dot1p Creating an Output QoS Policy To create an output QoS policy, use the following commands. 1 Create an output QoS policy.
PAGE 644
Queue Default Bandwidth Percentage for 4– Queue System Default Bandwidth Percentage for 8– Queue System 5 - 10% 6 - 25% 7 - 50% NOTE: The system supports 4 data queues. When you assign a percentage to one queue, note that this change also affects the amount of bandwidth that is allocated to other queues. Therefore, whenever you are allocating bandwidth to one queue, Dell Networking recommends evaluating your bandwidth requirements for all other queues as well.
PAGE 645
Applying a Class-Map or Input QoS Policy to a Queue To apply a class-map or input QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Assign an input QoS policy to a queue. POLICY-MAP-IN mode service-queue Applying an Input QoS Policy to an Input Policy Map To apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map, use the following command. • Apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map.
PAGE 646
Table 58. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Table 59. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN. • Enable the trust dot1p feature.
PAGE 647
Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command. Apply this command in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy (refer to Allocating Bandwidth to Queue). The bandwidth-percentage command in QOS-POLICY-OUT mode supersedes the service-class bandwidthpercentage command. • Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to queues globally.
PAGE 648
Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. • Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command. • Apply an input policy map to an interface. INTERFACE mode service-policy output You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it.
PAGE 649
1 Create the color-aware map QoS DSCP color map. CONFIGURATION mode qos dscp-color-map color-map-name 2 Create the color aware map profile. DSCP-COLOR-MAP dscp {yellow | red} {list-dscp-values} 3 Apply the map profile to the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode qos dscp-color-policy color-map-name Example: Create a DSCP Color Map The following example creates a DSCP color map profile, color-awareness policy, and applies it to interface te 1/11.
PAGE 650
summary: Displays summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. detail: Displays detailed color policy information on an interface interface: Enter the name of the interface that has the color policy configured. Examples for Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Display summary information about a color policy for one or more interfaces.
PAGE 651
Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing In strict-priority queuing, the system de-queues all packets from the assigned queue before servicing any other queues. You can assign strict-priority to one unicast queue, using the strict-priority command. • Policy-based per-queue rate shaping is not supported on the queue configured for strict-priority queuing.
PAGE 652
Figure 100. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Table 60. Pre-Defined WRED Profiles Default Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Maximum Drop Rate wred_drop 0 0 100 wred_teng_y 467 4671 100 wred_teng_g 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_y 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_g 467 4671 25 Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1 Create a WRED profile.
PAGE 653
Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it. DSCP is a 6–bit field. Dell Networking uses the first three bits (LSB) of this field (DP) to determine the drop precedence. • DP values of 110 and 100, 101 map to yellow; all other values map to green.
PAGE 654
Dell# Displaying egress–queue Statistics To display the number of transmitted and dropped packets and their rate on the egress queues of an interface, use the following command: • Display the number of packets and number of bytes on the egress-queue profile.
PAGE 655
• Status — indicates whether the specified policy-map can be completely applied to an interface in the port-pipe. • Allowed — indicates that the policy-map can be applied because the estimated number of CAM entries is less or equal to the available number of CAM entries. The number of interfaces in the port-pipe to which the policy-map can be applied is given in parentheses.
PAGE 656
Global Service Pools With WRED and ECN Settings Support for global service pools is now available. You can configure global service pools that are shared buffer pools accessed by multiple queues when the minimum guaranteed buffers for the queue are consumed. Two service pools are used– one for loss-based queues and the other for lossless (priority-based flow control (PFC)) queues. You can enable WRED and ECN configuration on the global servicepools.
PAGE 657
Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes The functionality to configure a weight factor for the WRED and ECN functionality for backplane ports is supported on the platform. WRED drops packets when the average queue length exceeds the configured threshold value to signify congestion. Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded.
PAGE 658
• Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently. • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
PAGE 659
3 Attach the policy-map to the interface. Dell Networking OS support different types of match qualifiers to classify the incoming traffic. Match qualifiers can be directly configured in the class-map command or it can be specified through one or more ACL which in turn specifies the combination of match qualifiers. Until Release 9.3(0.0), support is available for classifying traffic based on the 6-bit DSCP field of the IPv4 packet.
PAGE 660
By default, all packets are considered as ‘green’ (without the rate-policer and trust-diffserve configuration) and hence support would be provided to mark the packets as ‘yellow’ alone will be provided. By default Dell Networking OS drops all the ‘RED’ or ‘violate’ packets.
PAGE 661
seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 50 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 50 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map m
PAGE 662
Applying DSCP and VLAN Match Criteria on a Service Queue You can configure Layer 3 class maps which contain both a Layer 3 Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) and IP VLAN IDs as match criteria to filter incoming packets on a service queue on the switch. To configure a Layer 3 class map to classify traffic according to both an IP VLAN ID and DSCP value, use the match ip vlan vlanid command in class-map input configuration mode.
PAGE 663
Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and ColorMarking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded. If you configure ECN for WRED, devices employ this functionality of ECN to mark the packets and reduce the rate of sending packets in a congested, heavily-loaded network.
PAGE 664
Similar to ‘dscp’ qualifier in the existing L3 ACL command, the ‘ecn’ qualifier can be used along with all other supported ACL match qualifiers such as SIP/DIP/TCP/UDP/SRC PORT/DST PORT/ ICMP. Until Release 9.3(0.0), ACL supports classification based on the below TCP flags: • ACK • FIN • SYN • PSH • RST • URG You can now use the ‘ecn’ match qualifier along with the above TCP flag for classification.
PAGE 665
• FIN • SYN • PSH • RST • URG In the existing software, ECE/CWR TCP flag qualifiers are not supported. • Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently.
PAGE 666
! ip access-list standard dscp_40 seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50 ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map clas
PAGE 667
40 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
PAGE 668
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 62.
PAGE 669
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
PAGE 670
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes. By default, interfaces that you enable and configure with an IP address in the same subnet as the RIP network address receive RIPv1 and RIPv2 routes and send RIPv1 routes.
PAGE 671
Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process. With the redistribute command, you can include open shortest path first (OSPF), static, or directly connected routes in the RIP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use the following commands. • Include directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in RIP.
PAGE 672
INTERFACE mode ip rip send version [1] [2] Examples of the RIP Process To see whether the version command is configured, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. The following example shows the RIP configuration after the ROUTER RIP mode version command is set to RIPv2. When you set the ROUTER RIP mode version command, the interface () participating in the RIP process is also set to send and receive RIPv2 (shown in bold).
PAGE 673
Generating a Default Route Traffic is forwarded to the default route when the traffic’s network is not explicitly listed in the routing table. Default routes are not enabled in RIP unless specified. Use the default-information originate command in ROUTER RIP mode to generate a default route into RIP. In Dell Networking OS, default routes received in RIP updates from other routes are advertised if you configure the default-information originate command. • Specify the generation of a default route in RIP.
PAGE 674
• • weight: the range is from 1 to 255. The default is 120. • ip-address mask: the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), and the mask in slash format (/x). • access-list-name: the name of a configured IP ACL. Apply an additional number to the incoming or outgoing route metrics.
PAGE 675
Figure 101. RIP Topology Example RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Example of Configuring RIPv2 on Core 2 Core2(conf-if-gi-2/3)# Core2(conf-if-gi-2/3)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
PAGE 676
The following example shows the show ip route command to show the RIP setup on Core 2.
PAGE 677
Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 192.168.2.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.30.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core3(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.0 version 2 Core3(conf-router_rip)# Core 3 RIP Output The examples in this section show the core 2 RIP output. • To display Core 3 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 3 RIP setup, use the show ip route command.
PAGE 678
The following example shows the show ip protocols command to show the RIP configuration activity on Core 3.
PAGE 679
! interface GigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.11.20.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/4 ip address 192.168.1.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/5 ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
PAGE 680
41 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
PAGE 681
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
PAGE 682
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] • number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. • log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
PAGE 683
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. • integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. • owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
PAGE 684
42 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
PAGE 685
• Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
PAGE 686
no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)# Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports.
PAGE 687
Figure 102. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 688
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (GigabitEthernet 2/4) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 689
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 64.
PAGE 690
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
PAGE 691
• Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value • priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. Example of the bridge-priority Command A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned.
PAGE 692
In the following example, the bold line indicates that the interface is in EdgePort mode. Dell(conf-if-gi-2/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed.
PAGE 693
43 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 694
44 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
PAGE 695
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: • system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration.
PAGE 696
Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
PAGE 697
NOTE: If a console user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server if the privilege level is configured for that user in RADIUS, whether you configure RADIUS authorization. NOTE: RADIUS and TACACS servers support VRF-awareness functionality. You can create RADIUS and TACACS groups and then map multiple servers to a group. The group to which you map multiple servers is bound to a single VRF.
PAGE 698
3 Assign a method-list-name or the default list to the terminal line. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running-config in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH). You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines.
PAGE 699
The following example shows enabling local authentication for console and remote authentication for the VTY lines. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration Using AAA authentication, the switch acts as a RADIUS or TACACS+ client to send authentication requests to a TACACS+ or RADIUS server.
PAGE 700
Obscuring Passwords and Keys By default, the service password-encryption command stores encrypted passwords. For greater security, you can also use the service obscure-passwords command to prevent a user from reading the passwords and keys, including RADIUS, TACACS+ keys, router authentication strings, VRRP authentication by obscuring this information. Passwords and keys are stored encrypted in the configuration file and by default are displayed in the encrypted form when the configuration is displayed.
PAGE 701
After you configure other privilege levels, enter those levels by adding the level parameter after the enable command or by configuring a user name or password that corresponds to the privilege level. For more information about configuring user names, refer to Configuring a Username and Password. By default, commands in Dell Networking OS are assigned to different privilege levels. You can access those commands only if you have access to that privilege level.
PAGE 702
Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level. To change to a different privilege level, enter the enable command, then the privilege level.
PAGE 703
• 2 Secret: Specify the secret for the user. Configure a password for privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: • level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: enter a string up to 32 characters long. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter.
PAGE 704
The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed. In CONFIGURATION mode, john can access only the snmpserver commands. apollo% telnet 172.31.1.53 Trying 172.31.1.53... Connected to 172.31.1.53. Escape character is '^]'.
PAGE 705
EXEC Privilege mode enable or enable privilege-level • If you do not enter a privilege level, Dell Networking OS sets it to 15 by default. Move to a lower privilege level. EXEC Privilege mode disable level-number • level-number: The level-number you wish to set. If you enter disable without a level-number, your security level is 1. RADIUS Remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) is a distributed client/server protocol.
PAGE 706
Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout. When a user logs in, the lower of the two idle-time values (configured or default) is used. The idle-time value is updated if both of the following happens: • The administrator changes the idle-time of the line on which the user has logged in.
PAGE 707
• Monitoring RADIUS (optional) For a complete listing of all Dell Networking OS commands related to RADIUS, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide. NOTE: RADIUS authentication and authorization are done in a single step. Hence, authorization cannot be used independent of authentication. However, if you have configured RADIUS authorization and have not configured authentication, a message is logged stating this.
PAGE 708
Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. • Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host.
PAGE 709
• Configure the number of times Dell Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server retransmit retries • • retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries. Configure the time interval the system waits for a RADIUS server host response. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server timeout seconds • seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000. Default is 5 seconds. To view the configuration of RADIUS communication parameters, use the show running-config command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 710
Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} tacacs+ [...method3] The TACACS+ method must not be the last method specified. 3 Enter LINE mode. CONFIGURATION mode line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]} 4 Assign the method-list to the terminal line.
PAGE 711
Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command. • View TACACS+ transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug tacacs+ TACACS+ Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS+ server. Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes.
PAGE 712
To view the TACACS+ configuration, use the show running-config tacacs+ command in EXEC Privilege mode. To delete a TACACS+ server host, use the no tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} command. freebsd2# telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202. Escape character is '^]'.
PAGE 713
ssh {hostname} [-l username | -p port-number | -v {1 | 2}| -c encryption cipher | -m HMAC algorithm hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote device. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). • • SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes. Display SSH connection information.
PAGE 714
Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server. • debug ip ssh : enables collecting SSH debug information. • ip scp topdir : identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
PAGE 715
• rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. Dell(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
PAGE 716
• hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
PAGE 717
Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH server, use the ip ssh server cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH server will support. The following ciphers are available. • 3des-cbc • aes128-cbc • aes192-cbc • aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr The default cipher list is aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc.
PAGE 718
Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell (SSH) is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method. Enabling SSH Authentication by Password Authenticate an SSH client by prompting for a password when attempting to connect to the Dell Networking system. This setup is the simplest method of authentication and uses SSH version 1. To enable SSH password authentication, use the following command. • Enable SSH password authentication.
PAGE 719
Example of Generating RSA Keys admin@Unix_client#ssh-keygen -t rsa Generating public/private rsa key pair. Enter file in which to save the key (/home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa): /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa already exists. Overwrite (y/n)? y Enter passphrase (empty for no passphrase): Enter same passphrase again: Your identification has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa. Your public key has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa.pub. Configuring Host-Based SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host.
PAGE 720
10.16.127.201, ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8K7jLZRVfjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx/AyW hVgJDQh39k8v3e8eQvLnHBIsqIL8jVy1QHhUeb7GaDlJVEDAMz30myqQbJgXBBRTWgBpLWwL/ doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChjk9hL1by8cYZP2kYS2lnSyQWk= The following example shows creating rhosts. admin@Unix_client# ls id_rsa id_rsa.pub rhosts shosts admin@Unix_client# cat rhosts 10.16.127.201 admin Using Client-Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client, use the following command.
PAGE 721
VTY Line and Access-Class Configuration Various methods are available to restrict VTY access in Dell Networking OS. These depend on which authentication scheme you use — line, local, or remote. Table 65. VTY Access Authentication Method VTY access-class support? Username access-class support? Remote authorization support? Line YES NO NO Local NO YES NO TACACS+ YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 5.2.1.0 and later) RADIUS YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 6.1.1.
PAGE 722
Dell(config-line-vty)#login authentication localmethod Dell(config-line-vty)#end VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the VTY line. The Dell Networking OS takes the access class from the VTY line and applies it to ALL users. Dell Networking OS does not need to know the identity of the incoming user and can immediately apply the access class.
PAGE 723
• System-Defined RBAC User Roles • Creating a New User Role • Modifying Command Permissions for Roles • Adding and Deleting Users from a Role • Role Accounting • Configuring AAA Authentication for Roles • Configuring AAA Authorization for Roles • Configuring an Accounting for Roles • Applying an Accounting Method to a Role • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles • Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC • Displaying User Roles • Displaying Accounting for Use
PAGE 724
Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization You can configure authorization so that access to commands is determined only by the user’s role. If the user has no user role, access to the system is denied as the user will not be able to login successfully.
PAGE 725
System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles. The system defined user roles are as follows: • Network Operator (netoperator) - This user role has no privilege to modify any configuration on the switch. You can access Exec mode (monitoring) to view the current configuration and status information.
PAGE 726
Consider the following when creating a user role: • Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and user names. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the "role" command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
PAGE 727
The following output displays the modes available for the role command. Dell (conf)#role configure exec interface line route-map router ? Global configuration mode Exec Mode Interface configuration mode Line Configuration mode Route map configuration mode Router configuration mode Examples: Deny Network Administrator from Using the show users Command.
PAGE 728
The following example removes the secadmin access to LINE mode and then verifies that the security administrator can no longer access LINE mode, using the show role mode configure line command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 729
AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
PAGE 730
Examples of Applying a Method List The following configuration example applies a method list: TACACS+, RADIUS and local: ! radius-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! tacacs-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! aaa authentication login ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa authorization exec ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa start-stop tacacs+ ! The following configuration example applies a method list other than default to each VTY line.
PAGE 731
Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
PAGE 732
The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role. Dell(conf)#aaa accounting command role secadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Applying an Accounting Method to a Role To apply an accounting method list to a role executed by a user with that user role, use the accounting command in LINE mode.
PAGE 733
secadmin sysadmin MAC testadmin Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
PAGE 734
• If the credentials are invalid, the authentication fails. NOTE: 2FA does not support RADIUS authentications done with SSHv1, REST, Web UI, and OMI. Handling Access-Challenge Message To provide a two-step verification in addition to the username and password, NAS prompts for additional information. An AccessChallenge request is sent from the RADIUS server to NAS.
PAGE 735
This module requires NAS for handling the access challenge from the RADIUS server. NAS sends the input OTP in an Access-Request to the RADIUS server, and the user authentication succeeds or fails depending upon the Access-Accept or Access-Reject response received at NAS from the RADIUS server. Configuring the System to Drop Certain ICMP Reply Messages You can configure the Dell Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
PAGE 736
Table 67.
PAGE 737
45 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
PAGE 738
Figure 103. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
PAGE 739
2 Assign access and trunk ports to a VLAN (Creating Access and Trunk Ports). 3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands.
PAGE 740
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
PAGE 741
NOTE: You can add a trunk port to an 802.1Q VLAN as well as a Stacking VLAN only when the TPID 0x8100. 2 Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged. INTERFACE VLAN mode [tagged | untagged] Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, GigabitEthernet 1/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
PAGE 742
Dell#debug member port gigabitethernet 2/4 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) Dell# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
PAGE 743
Figure 104.
PAGE 744
Figure 105.
PAGE 745
Figure 106. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch The following table details the outcome of matched and mismatched TPIDs in a VLAN-stacking network with the S-Series. Table 68. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID Network Position Incoming Packet TPID Ingress Access Point untagged single-tag (0x8100) System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
PAGE 746
Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
PAGE 747
Honoring the Incoming DEI Value To honor the incoming DEI value, you must explicitly map the DEI bit to an Dell Networking OS drop precedence. Precedence can have one of three colors. Precedence Description Green High-priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. Yellow Lower-priority packets that are treated as best-effort. Red Lowest-priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status).
PAGE 748
Gi 2/9 Gi 2/10 Yellow Yellow 0 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS. Dynamic Mode CoS maps the C-Tag 802.1p value to a S-Tag 802.1p value. Figure 107.
PAGE 749
Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3. All other packets will have outer dot1p 0 and hence are queued to Queue 1. They are therefore policed according to qos-policy-input 1.
PAGE 750
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80-C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
PAGE 751
Dell Networking OS Behavior: In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell Networkingunique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
PAGE 752
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
PAGE 753
4 Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.
PAGE 754
46 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
PAGE 755
hardware sampling rate is backed-off from 512 to 1024. Note that port 1 maintains its sampling rate of 16384; port 1 is unaffected because it maintains its configured sampling rate of 16384.: • • • If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate.
PAGE 756
Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
PAGE 757
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally Dell(conf-if-gi-1/10)#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 86400 Global default extended maximum header size: 256 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.12, Agent IP addr: 100.1.1.
PAGE 758
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Global) The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. The second bold lines indicate sFlow is enabled on Gi 1/16 and Gi 1/17 Dell#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
PAGE 759
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) Dell#show sflow Stack-unit 1 Stack-unit 1 Samples rcvd from h/w Total UDP packets exported UDP packets exported via RPM UDP packets dropped :0 :0 :0 :36 Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both.
PAGE 760
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depend on the type of sampled packet. The platform supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.
PAGE 761
Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell Networking system does not export extended-gateway data. • If the IP source address is learned via IGP, srcAS and srcPeerAS are zero. • The srcAS and srcPeerAS might be zero even though the IP source address is learned via BGP.
PAGE 762
47 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
PAGE 763
Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB). MIBs are hierarchically structured and use object identifiers to address managed objects, but managed objects also have a textual name called an object descriptor.
PAGE 764
In this example, for a specified user and a group, the AES128-CFB algorithm, the authentication password to enable the server to receive packets from the host, and the privacy password to encode the message contents are configured. SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level.
PAGE 765
Important Points to Remember • Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, increase the timeout value to greater than 3 seconds, and increase the retry value to greater than 2 seconds on your SNMP server. • User ACLs override group ACLs. Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models.
PAGE 766
• auth — password privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password authentication. • priv — password and privacy privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password and privacy privileges. To set up user-based security (SNMPv3), use the following commands. • Configure the user with view privileges only (no password or privacy privileges).
PAGE 767
Reading Managed Object Values You may only retrieve (read) managed object values if your management station is a member of the same community as the SNMP agent. Dell Networking supports RFC 4001, Textual Conventions for Internet Work Addresses that defines values representing a type of internet address. These values display for ipAddressTable objects using the snmpwalk command. There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data. • Read the value of a single managed object.
PAGE 768
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands. • (From a Dell Networking system) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
PAGE 769
• • Dell Networking enterpriseSpecific environment traps — fan, supply, and temperature. Dell Networking enterpriseSpecific protocol traps — bgp, ecfm, stp, and xstp. To configure the system to send SNMP notifications, use the following commands. 1 Configure the Dell Networking system to send notifications to an SNMP server. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c |3] [community-string] To send trap messages, enter the keyword traps.
PAGE 770
RPM_DOWN: RPM 0 down - card removed HOT_FAILOVER: RPM Failover Completed SFM_DISCOVERY: Found SFM 1 SFM_REMOVE: Removed SFM 1 MAJOR_SFM: Major alarm: Switch fabric down MAJOR_SFM_CLR: Major alarm cleared: Switch fabric up MINOR_SFM: MInor alarm: No working standby SFM MINOR_SFM_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: Working standby SFM present TASK SUSPENDED: SUSPENDED - svce:%d - inst:%d - task:%s RPM0-P:CP %CHMGR-2-CARD_PARITY_ERR ABNORMAL_TASK_TERMINATION: CRASH - task:%s %s CPU_THRESHOLD: Cpu %s usage above threshol
PAGE 771
Level 7 VLAN 1000 entity Enable entity change traps Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1487406) 4:07:54.06, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 4 Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1488564) 4:08:05.64, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.47.2.0.1, SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 5 Trap SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (1489064) 4:08:10.64, SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.
PAGE 772
"NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 2 Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 00:46:13: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-NOT_REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable Following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is resumed: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (10230) 0:01:42.
PAGE 773
MIB Object OID Object Values Description • copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5 1 = Dell Networking OS file 2 = running-config 3 = startup-config Specifies the type of file to copy to. • • copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.6 1 = flash If copySourceFileType is set to running-config or startupconfig, copySrcFileName is not required. If copySourceFileType is running-config or startupconfig, the default copyDestFileLocation is flash.
PAGE 774
snmp-server community community-name rw 2 Copy the f10-copy-config.mib MIB from the Dell iSupport web page to the server to which you are copying the configuration file. 3 On the server, use the snmpset command as shown in the following example. snmpset -v snmp-version -c community-name -m mib_path/f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ipaddress mib-object.index {i | a | s} object-value... • Every specified object must have an object value and must precede with the keyword i. Refer to the previous table.
PAGE 775
Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config To copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine, use the following command. • Copy the startup-config to the running-config from a UNIX machine. snmpset -c private -v 2c force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.index i 2 Examples of Copying Configuration Files from a UNIX Machine The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using the object name.
PAGE 776
snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 3 copyDestFileType.index i 1 copyDestFileName.index s filepath/ filename copyDestFileLocation.index i 3 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address Example of Copying Configuration Files via TFTP From a UNIX Machine .snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.4 i 3 copyDestFileType.4 i 1 copyDestFileLocation.4 i 3 copyDestFileName.4 s /home/myfilename copyServerAddress.4 a 11.
PAGE 777
MIB Object OID Values Description 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.15 Row status Specifies the state of the copy operation. Uses CreateAndGo when you are performing the copy. The state is set to active when the copy is completed. Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.
PAGE 778
MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory. The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory. Table 75. MIB Objects for Displaying the Available Memory Size on Flash via SNMP MIB Object OID Description chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.6 Contains flash memory usage in percentage.
PAGE 779
MIB Object OID Description chSysCoresProcess 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5 Contains information that includes the process names that generated each core file. Viewing the Software Core Files Generated by the System • To view the software core files generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.2 = 2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.
PAGE 780
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.4.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.5.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.6.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.7.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.8.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.9.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10.2107012 = Counter64: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11.
PAGE 781
Viewing the Available Partitions on Flash • • To view the available partitions on flash using SNMP, use the following command: snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -On 10.16.150.97 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.1 = STRING: "tmpfs" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.2 = STRING: "/dev/wd0i" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.3 = STRING: "mfs:477" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.2.4 = STRING: "/dev/wd0e" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.1 = INTEGER: 40960 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.
PAGE 782
MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the packets transmitted or dropped per unicast or multicast egress queue. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 79. MIB Objects to display egress queue statistics MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpEgrQTxPacketsRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.6 Rate of Packets transmitted per Unicast/ Multicast Egress queue. dellNetFpEgrQTxBytesRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.20.1.
PAGE 783
INTEGER: 1275078656 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = INTEGER: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.70.70.70.2.32.1.4.70.70.70.2.1.4.70.70.70.2 = INTEGER: 2097157 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.8.1.1.4.80.80.80.0.24.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.
PAGE 784
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.1.32.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.30.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.0.24.0.0.0.0 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.70.70.70.1.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = STRING: "CP" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.
PAGE 785
MIB Support for entAliasMappingTable Dell Networking provides a method to map the physical interface to its corresponding ifindex value. The entAliasMappingTable table contains zero or more rows, representing the logical entity mapping and physical component to external MIB identifiers. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 81. MIB Objects for entAliasMappingTable MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingTable 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2 Contains information about entAliasMapping table.
PAGE 786
MIB Object OID dot3adAgg 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1 dot3adAggTable 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1 Contains information about every Aggregator that is associated with a system. dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.
PAGE 787
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggPortListPorts 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.2.1.1 Contains a complete set of ports currently associated with the Aggregator. Viewing the LAG MIB • To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.
PAGE 788
Displaying the Ports in a VLAN Dell Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command. Examples of Viewing VLAN Ports Using SNMP The following example shows viewing the VLAN interface index number using SNMP. Dell(conf)#do show interface vlan id 10 % Error: No such interface name.
PAGE 789
> snmpget -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The value 40 is in the first set of 7 hex pairs, indicating that these ports are in Stack Unit 1. The hex value 40 is 0100 0000 in binary. As described, the left-most position in the string represents Port 1. The next position from the left represents Port 2 and has a value of 1, indicating that Port 1/2 is in VLAN 10.
PAGE 790
Managing Overload on Startup If you are running IS-IS, you can set a specific amount of time to prevent ingress traffic from being received after a reload and allow the routing protocol upgrade process to complete. To prevent ingress traffic on a router while the IS reload is implemented, use the following command. • Set the amount of time after an IS-IS reload is performed before ingress traffic is allowed at startup.
PAGE 791
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
PAGE 792
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
PAGE 793
Table 84. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
PAGE 794
Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state Gi 1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.
PAGE 795
"NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.0 = INTEGER: 2 Following is the sample audit log message that other syslog servers that are reachable receive: Oct 21 00:46:13: dv-fedgov-s4810-6: %EVL-6-NOT_REACHABLE:Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable Following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is resumed: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (10230) 0:01:42.
PAGE 796
Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.3 Optics Type SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.4 Vendor Name SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.5 Part Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.6 Serial Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.7 Transmit Power SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
PAGE 797
48 Stacking Using the Dell Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 1 to 6 and it supports stacking up to six units.
PAGE 798
• Inter-switch stacking link failure • Switch insertion • Switch removal If the master switch goes off line, the standby replaces it as the new master and the switch with the next highest priority or MAC address becomes standby. Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. • Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0.
PAGE 799
After the former master switch recovers, despite having a higher priority or MAC address, it does not recover its master role but instead takes the next available role. To view failover details, use the show redundancy command. MAC Addressing on Stacks The stack has three MAC addresses: the chassis MAC, interface MAC, and null interface MAC. All interfaces in the stack use the interface MAC address of the management unit, and the chassis MAC for the stack is the master’s chassis MAC.
PAGE 800
Going for reboot.
PAGE 801
Figure 110. Supported Stacking Topologies High Availability on Stacks Stacks have master and standby management units analogous to Dell Networking route processor modules (RPM). The master unit synchronizes the running configuration and protocol states so that the system fails over in the event of a hardware or software fault on the master unit. In such an event, or when the master unit is removed, the standby unit becomes the stack manager and Dell Networking OS elects a new standby unit.
PAGE 802
Failover Count: Last failover timestamp: Last failover Reason: Last failover type: 0 None None None -- Last Data Block Sync Record: ------------------------------------------------stack-unit Config: no block sync done Start-up Config: no block sync done Runtime Event Log: no block sync done Running Config: no block sync done ACL Mgr: no block sync done LACP: no block sync done STP: no block sync done SPAN: no block sync done Dell# Management Access on Stacks You can access the stack via the console port
PAGE 803
• You cannot stack one system with other system types. • You cannot enable stacking and virtual link trunking (VLT) simultaneously on the device. To convert a stacked unit to VLT, see Reconfiguring Stacked Switches as VLT. • Each 10G data port is configured as stacking port in predefined groups called stack-group. • When using the 40G ports, you can configure a single port as a stack port; each 40G port is a stack-group. • The S3048–ON has one port assigned to each stack group.
PAGE 804
Figure 111. Stack-Group Assignments You can connect the units while they are powered down or up. Stacking ports are bi-directional. When a unit is added to a stack, the management unit performs a system check on the new unit to ensure the hardware type is compatible. A similar check is performed on the Dell Networking OS version. Syslog messages are generated by the management unit: • • the syslog includes the unit number, previous version, and version being downloaded.
PAGE 805
3 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 4 After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up in a stack after the reboot completes. To view the port assignments, use the show system stack-unit command.
PAGE 806
Configure the stack groups on the units in the following order: • • • • • Configure the first stack group on unit 1: stack-unit 1 stack-group 1 Configure the stack groups on unit 2: stack-unit 2 stack-group 0 and stack-unit 2 stack-group 1 Configure the stack groups on unit 3: stack-unit 3 stack-group 0 and stack-unit 3 stack-group 1 Configure the stack groups on unit 4: stack-unit 4 stack-group 1 and stack-unit 4 stack-group 1 Configure the final stack-group on unit 1 to complete the stack: stack-unit 1 s
PAGE 807
4 4 2 3 up up up up 7200 7200 The following example shows how to configure two new switches for stacking using 10G ports. Dell-1(conf)#stack-unit 1 stack-group 1 Setting ports Te 1/50 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload. [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell-2(conf)#stack-unit 2 stack-group 0 Setting ports Te 2/49 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload.
PAGE 808
4 Assign a stack group to each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unitstack-unit-number stack-group stack-group-number 5 Connect the new unit to the stack using stacking cables. Example of Adding a Stack Unit with a Conflicting Stack Number (Before and After) The following example shows adding a stack unit with a conflicting stack number (before).
PAGE 809
CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit 1 stack-group group-number 6 • stack-unit 1: defines the default ID unit-number in the initial configuration of a switch. • stack-group group-number: configures a port for stacking. Save the stacking configuration on the ports. EXEC Privilege mode write memory 7 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack.
PAGE 810
• If one of the new stacks receives only the standby unit, it becomes the master unit of the new stack, and Dell Networking OS elects a new standby unit. • If one of the new stacks receives neither the master nor the standby management unit, the stack is reset so that a new election can take place.
PAGE 811
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief • Display the same information in show system, but only for the specified unit. EXEC Privilege mode show system stack-unit • Display topology and stack link status for the entire stack. EXEC Privilege mode show system stack-ports [status | topology] Examples of the show system Commands Display information about a switch stack using the show system command. The following is an example of the show system command to view the stack details.
PAGE 812
1 2 3 4 5 6 Member Member Management Member Member Member not present not present online not present not present not present S3048-ON S3048-ON S3048-ON 9.8(0.
PAGE 813
Managing Redundancy on a Stack Use the following commands to manage the redundancy on a stack. • Reset the current management unit and make the standby unit the new master unit. EXEC Privilege mode redundancy force-failover stack-unit • A new standby is elected. When the former stack master comes back online, it becomes a member unit. Prevent the stack master from rebooting after a failover.
PAGE 814
Displaying the Status of Stacking Ports To display the status of the stacking ports, including the topology, use the following command. • Display the stacking ports.
PAGE 815
3 3 2 3 up down up 18000 Speed in RPM Dell# The following example shows three switches stacked together in a daisy chain topology.
PAGE 816
5 6 Member Member not present not present The following example shows removing a stack member (after). Dell#show system brief Stack MAC Reload-Type : 00:21:22:23:24:25 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Standby online S3048-ON S3048-ON 9.8(0.0P2) 52 2 Management online S3048-ON S3048-ON 9.8(0.
PAGE 817
Example of Console Messages About Flapping Link ---------------------MANAGMENT UNIT-----------------------------Error: Stack Port 50 has flapped 5 times within 10 seconds.Shutting down this st ack port now. Error: Please check the stack cable/module and power-cycle the stack. 10:55:20: %STKUNIT1-M:CP %KERN-2-INT: Error: Stack Port 50 has flapped 5 times w ithin 10 seconds.Shutting down this stack port now.
PAGE 818
stack-1# 818 Stacking
PAGE 819
49 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The minimum number of packets per second (PPS) that storm control can limit on the device is two.
PAGE 820
• Configure storm control. • INTERFACE mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only). INTERFACE mode storm-control broadcast packets_per_second in • Configure the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only. INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in • Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate.
PAGE 821
50 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 822
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
PAGE 823
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 112. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
PAGE 824
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
PAGE 825
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 826
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
PAGE 827
• Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
PAGE 828
• Enable PortFast on an interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree stp-id portfast [bpduguard | [shutdown-on-violation]] Example of Verifying PortFast is Enabled on an Interface To verify that PortFast is enabled on a port, use the show spanning-tree command from EXEC Privilege mode or the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell Networking recommends using the show config command.
PAGE 829
Figure 114. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. • drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
PAGE 830
Dell(conf-if-gi-1/7)#do show ip interface brief gigabitEthernet 1/7 Interface IP-Address OK Method Status Protocol GigabitEthernet 1/7 unassigned YES Manual up up Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge. You can also specify that a bridge is the root or the secondary root. To change the bridge priority or specify that a bridge is the root or secondary root, use the following command.
PAGE 831
the port on Switch C transitions from a forwarding to a root-inconsistent state (shown by the green X icon). As a result, Switch A becomes the root bridge. Figure 115. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
PAGE 832
spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard • 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. • mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. • rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. • pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port. To disable STP root guard on a port or port-channel interface, use the no spanning-tree 0 rootguard command in an interface configuration mode.
PAGE 833
lower left), Switch C does not receive BPDUs from Switch B. When the max-age timer expires, the STP port on Switch C becomes unblocked and transitions to Forwarding state. A loop is created as both Switch A and Switch C transmit traffic to Switch B. As shown in the following illustration (STP topology 2, upper right), a loop can also be created if the forwarding port on Switch B becomes busy and does not forward BPDUs within the configured forward-delay time.
PAGE 834
Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
PAGE 835
Example of Viewing STP Guard Configuration Dell#show spanning-tree 0 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type --------- -------- --------- ---------Gi 1/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard Gi 1/2 0 LIS Loopguard Gi 1/3 0 EDS (Shut) Bpduguard Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 835
PAGE 836
51 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 117.
PAGE 837
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
PAGE 838
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
PAGE 839
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Dell#support-assist activity full-transfer start now Dell#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity.
PAGE 840
action-manifest remove Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
PAGE 841
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
PAGE 842
SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.1 port 90 username test password 0 test1 Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 3 Enable communication with the SupportAssist server.
PAGE 843
activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.com phone primary 123422 alternate 8395729 preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.
PAGE 844
52 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
PAGE 845
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
PAGE 846
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes.
PAGE 847
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
PAGE 848
To configure NTP authentication, use the following commands. 1 Enable NTP authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number md5 key Configure the following parameters: • • 3 number: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key.
PAGE 849
1w6d23h : NTP: rcv packet from 192.168.1.1 leap 0, mode 4, version 3, stratum 1, ppoll 1024 rtdel 0000 (0.000000), rtdsp AF587 (10959.090820), refid 4C4F434C (76.79.67.76) ref CD7E14FD.43F7CED9 (16:29:49.265 UTC Wed Apr 1 2009) org CD7F5368.D0535000 (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) rec CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) xmt CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) inp CD7F5368.D1974000 (15:8:24.
PAGE 850
Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization You can configure the system to send an audit log message to a syslog server if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). However, time synchronization still occurs. To configure the offset-threshold, follow this procedure. • Specify the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the system time deviates from the NTP server.
PAGE 851
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
PAGE 852
• end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. • end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. • end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. • offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 853
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
PAGE 854
53 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
PAGE 855
no ip address ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
PAGE 856
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered gigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered gigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
PAGE 857
! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.
PAGE 858
54 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity.
PAGE 859
Figure 119. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
PAGE 860
Figure 120. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
PAGE 861
• • • If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
PAGE 862
4 (Optional) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in the uplink-state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5 (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group.
PAGE 863
3/50 02:36:43: 3/51 02:36:43: 02:36:43: 02:36:43: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Te %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/49 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/50 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 3/51 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_DN: Changed interface Admin state to down: Gi 1/7 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: G
PAGE 864
• group-id: The values are from 1 to 16. Examples of Viewing UFD Information (S50) The following example shows viewing the uplink state group status.
PAGE 865
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:01:23 The following example shows viewing the UFD configuration.
PAGE 866
Dell# 00:13:06: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Dell# show running-config uplink-state-group ! uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream GigabitEthernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 upstream GigabitEthernet 1/3-4 Dell# show uplink-state-group 3 Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up Dell# show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up Upstrea
PAGE 867
55 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://www.dell.
PAGE 868
56 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
PAGE 869
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
PAGE 870
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. Dell Networking OS supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
PAGE 871
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 872
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/2 Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) When you r
PAGE 873
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Gi 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/3 Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/1 4 Inactive Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged gigabitethernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged GigabitEthernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Active U Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Gi 1/3
PAGE 874
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
PAGE 875
57 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two Dell switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices. Overview In a traditional switched topology as shown below, spanning tree protocols (STPs) are used to block one or more links to prevent loops in the network.
PAGE 876
Figure 123. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
PAGE 877
Figure 124. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • • • • • • • • • • • • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
PAGE 878
VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches.
PAGE 879
Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains In a VLT domain, the MAC address of any host connected to the VLT peers is synchronized between the VLT nodes. In the following example, VLAN 10 is spanned across three VLT domains. Figure 125. Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2.
PAGE 880
30 30 30 30 30 30 a0:00:a1:00:00:07 a0:00:a1:00:00:08 a0:00:a1:00:00:09 a0:00:a1:00:00:0a a0:00:a1:00:00:0b a0:00:a1:00:00:0c Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active Po 11 Active VLT-10-PEER-2#show vlt statistics mac VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:7 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:9 L2 Reg Request sent:0 L2 Reg Request rcvd:0 L2 Reg Response sent:0 L2
PAGE 881
Figure 126. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer. For better resiliency in the aggregation, Dell Networking recommends running the internal gateway protocol (IGP) on the VLTi VLAN to synchronize the L3 routing table across the two nodes on a VLT system. Enhanced VLT Enhanced VLT (eVLT)) refers to the ability to connect two VLT domains.
PAGE 882
Figure 127. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior occurs. • VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. • If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree.
PAGE 883
• If the DHCP server is located on the ToR and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure. • If the source is connected to an orphan (non-spanned, non-VLT) port in a VLT peer, the receiver is connected to a VLT (spanned) port-channel, and the VLT port-channel link between the VLT peer connected to the source and ToR is down, traffic is duplicated due to route inconsistency between peers.
PAGE 884
• • Separately configure each VLT peer switch with the same VLT domain ID and the VLT version. If the system detects mismatches between VLT peer switches in the VLT domain ID or VLT version, the VLT Interconnect (VLTi) does not activate. To find the reason for the VLTi being down, use the show vlt statistics command to verify that there are mismatch errors, then use the show vlt brief command on each VLT peer to view the VLT version on the peer switch.
PAGE 885
• • To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 48 port-channels are supported; up to 16 member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device. • The discovery protocol running between VLT peers automatically generates the ID number of the port channel that connects an access device and a VLT switch.
PAGE 886
• • • VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group. To ensure VRRP operation in a VLT domain, configure VRRP group priority on each VLT peer so that a peer is either the master or backup for all VRRP groups configured on its interfaces. For more information, see Setting VRRP Group (Virtual Router) Priority. • To verify that a VLT peer is consistently configured for either the master or backup role in all VRRP groups, use the show vrrp command on each peer.
PAGE 887
• Configure any ports at the edge of the spanning tree’s operating domain as edge ports, which are directly connected to end stations or server racks. Disable RSTP on ports connected directly to Layer 3-only routers not running STP or configure them as edge ports. • Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network.
PAGE 888
VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up, if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start-up configuration, they are not immediately enabled. To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node, the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic. The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer.
PAGE 889
Figure 128. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
PAGE 890
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
PAGE 891
Figure 129. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 130. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • Avoids sub-optimal routing • Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
PAGE 892
• You can reduce the number of VLTi port channel members based on your specific design. With peer routing, you need not configure VRRP for the participating VLANs. As both VLT nodes act as a gateway for its peer, irrespective of the gateway IP address, the traffic flows upstream without any latency. There is no limitation for the number of VLANS. VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer.
PAGE 893
The advantages of syncing the multicast routes between VLT peers are: • VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
PAGE 894
RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
PAGE 895
Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 1) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 0 Configuring VLT To configure VLT, use the following procedure.
PAGE 896
3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: 4 • For a 1-GigabitEthernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Ensure that the port channel is active.
PAGE 897
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode primary-priority value The priority values are from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. If the primary peer fails, the secondary peer (with the higher priority) takes the primary role. If the primary peer (with the lower priority) later comes back online, it is assigned the secondary role (there is no preemption). 6 (Optional) Prevent a possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain.
PAGE 898
CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1 Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain.
PAGE 899
Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands. On a VLT peer switch: To connect to an attached device, configure the same port channel ID number on each peer switch in the VLT domain. 1 Configure the same port channel to be used to connect to an attached device and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2 Remove an IP address from the interface.
PAGE 900
The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 3 Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Configuring Enhanced VLT (Optional) To configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) between two VLT domains on your network, use the following procedure.
PAGE 901
The format is aaaa.bbbb.cccc. Also reconfigure the same MAC address on the VLT peer switch. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 7 When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the following command.
PAGE 902
16 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2. To verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the show commands described in Verifying a VLT Configuration.
PAGE 903
show running-config entity 12 Verify that VLT is running. EXEC mode show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13 Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1.
PAGE 904
2 Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3 In the Top of Rack unit, configure LACP in the physical ports (shown for VLT peer 1 only. Repeat steps for VLT peer 2. The bold vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 indicates that port-channel 2 is the port-channel id configured in VLT peer 2).
PAGE 905
Role Role Priority ICL Link Status HeartBeat Status VLT Peer Status Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay-Restore timer Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : : : : : : : : : : Secondary 32768 Up Up Up 6(3) 00:01:e8:8a:e9:91 00:01:e8:8a:e9:76 6(3) 90 seconds : : : : 60 seconds Disabled 0 seconds 150 seconds Verify that the VLT LAG is up in VLT peer unit.
PAGE 906
Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations. When you enable VLT, the show spanningtree pvst brief command output displays VLT information. Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 1000 brief VLAN 1000 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.9b79 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.
PAGE 907
Figure 131. Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. Dell#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
PAGE 908
The following is the configuration in interfaces: Dell#1#sh run int ma0/0 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
PAGE 909
Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. Dell#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. Dell#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.
PAGE 910
----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.2 Up default 1 3 34998 4 5 Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed.
PAGE 911
Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
PAGE 912
The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
PAGE 913
The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backup-destination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer. Dell-2#sh run | find vlt vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 10 back-up destination 10.10.10.
PAGE 914
network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passive-interface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1. Dell-2#show ip ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 172.15.1.
PAGE 915
R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4. These three loopback interfaces are advertised to the VLT pair, Dell#1 and Dell#2) network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.
PAGE 916
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to Dell#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has Dell#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
PAGE 917
Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range gigabitethernet 1/16 - 1/17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-gi-1/16-17)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
PAGE 918
Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdown Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#vlt domain 200 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.18.130.12 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-routing Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
PAGE 919
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
PAGE 920
HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
PAGE 921
VLT Role ---------VLT Role: System MAC address: System Role Priority: Local System MAC address: Local System Role Priority: Secondary 00:01:e8:8a:df:bc 32768 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.
PAGE 922
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 We are the root Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.
PAGE 923
NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Active U Po110(Te 1/51) T Po100(Te 1/49,50) Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link.
PAGE 924
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 89. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
PAGE 925
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take information, refer to the Release Notes for this release. VLT LAG ID is not configured on A syslog error message is one VLT peer generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. VLT LAG ID mismatch A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers.
PAGE 926
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PAGE 927
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
PAGE 928
Table 90.
PAGE 929
VLT LAG Mode Peer1 PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer2 ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
PAGE 930
7 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down.
PAGE 931
• Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled.
PAGE 932
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
PAGE 933
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2 Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3 Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
PAGE 934
Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 Dell#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member
PAGE 935
Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-
PAGE 936
IPv6 Peer Routing in VLT Domains Overview VLT enables the physical links between two devices that are called VLT nodes or peers, and within a VLT domain, to be considered as a single logical link to external devices that are connected using LAG bundles to both the VLT peers. This capability enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning tree protocol (STP), thereby providing a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization.
PAGE 937
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a Non-VLT Domain Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from Layer 2 access nodes. With ND synchronization, both the VLT nodes perform Layer 3 forwarding on behalf of each other. Synchronization of NDPM entries learned on non-VLT interfaces between the non-VLT nodes.
PAGE 938
Figure 133. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
PAGE 939
Figure 134. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
PAGE 940
Neighbor Advertisement from Non-VLT Hosts Consider a situation in which NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node1 on a non-VLT interface and NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node2 on a non-VLT interface. When VLT node1 receives NA on a VLT interface, it learns the Host MAC address on the received interface. This learned neighbor entry is synchronized to VLT node2 as it is learned on ICL.
PAGE 941
When VLT node receives traffic from north bound intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic to VLT interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to Non-VLT host traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic over ICL interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL.
PAGE 942
58 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 943
Figure 135. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
PAGE 944
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
PAGE 945
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
PAGE 946
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 136. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
PAGE 947
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
PAGE 948
Figure 137. VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 949
switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains.
PAGE 950
The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 951
The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.2 Vl 102 0 Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
PAGE 952
59 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
PAGE 953
Figure 138. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
PAGE 954
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the nondefault VRF. Table 91.
PAGE 955
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
PAGE 956
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
PAGE 957
show ip vrf [vrf-name] Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
PAGE 958
Task Command Syntax Command Mode 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF. CONFIGURATION ip vrf management 2 Assign a management port to a management VRF.
PAGE 959
management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 gigabitethernet 1/1 . • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery. CONFIGURATION ipv6 neighbor vrf management 1::1 gigabitethernet 1/1 xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Sample VRF Configuration The following configuration illustrates a typical VRF set-up.
PAGE 960
Figure 140. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
PAGE 961
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
PAGE 962
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged GigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
PAGE 963
Dell#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set C C O Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.
PAGE 964
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway ----------------C 1.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 128 O 10.0.0.0/24 via 1.0.0.1, Vl 128 C 11.0.0.
PAGE 965
interface GigabitEthernet 1/10 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.2 vrf VRF1 Dynamic Route Leaking Route Leaking is a powerful feature that enables communication between isolated (virtual) routing domains by segregating and sharing a set of services such as VOIP, Video, and so on that are available on one routing domain with other virtual domains.
PAGE 966
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-Shared is created and the interface 1/4 is assigned to this VRF. 2 Configure the export target in the source VRF:. ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 4 Configure the import target in VRF-red. ip route-import 1:1 5 Configure the export target in VRF-red.
PAGE 967
ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-Blue route-export route-import 3:3 1:1 VRF-Green VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, Gi 1/11 0/0 00:00:10 22:39:59 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.
PAGE 968
C 122.2.2.0/24 O 44.4.4.4/32 00:00:11 Direct, VRF-Blue:Gi 1/22 0/0 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 C Direct, Gi 1/4 144.4.4.0/24 0/0 22:39:61 00:32:36 Important Points to Remember • If the target VRF conatins the same prefix as either the sourced or Leaked route from some other VRF, then route Leaking for that particular prefix fails and the following error-log is thrown. SYSLOG (“Duplicate prefix found %s in the target VRF %d”, address, import_vrf_id) with The type/level is EVT_LOGWARNING.
PAGE 969
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. Dell(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes. Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol ospf Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol bgp This action specifies that the route-map contains OSPF and BGP as the matching criteria for exporting routes from vrf-red.
PAGE 970
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
PAGE 971
60 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
PAGE 972
Figure 141. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
PAGE 973
Table 93. Recommended VRRP Advertise Intervals Recommended Advertise Interval Groups/Interface Total VRRP Groups Groups/Interface Less than 250 1 second 12 Between 250 and 450 2–3 seconds 24 Between 450 and 600 3–4 seconds 36 Between 600 and 800 4 seconds 48 Between 800 and 1000 5 seconds 84 Between 1000 and 1200 7 seconds 100 Between 1200 and 1500 8 seconds 120 VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured.
PAGE 974
INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. Dell(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
PAGE 975
1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-gi-1/2-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3. Dell_master_switch(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 3 Set the backup switches to version 3.
PAGE 976
Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.3 The following example shows how to verify a virtual IP address configuration. NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet.
PAGE 977
• Configure the priority for the VRRP group. INTERFACE -VRID mode priority priority The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Examples of the priority Command Dell(conf-if-gi-1/2)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/2-vrid-111)#priority 125 To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
PAGE 978
Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type ? Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type simple 7 force10 The following example shows verifying the VRRP authentication configuration using the show conf command. The bold section shows the encrypted password.
PAGE 979
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
PAGE 980
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
PAGE 981
• (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show running-config interface interface Examples of Configuring and Viewing the track Command The following example shows how to configure tracking using the track command. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#track gigabitethernet 1/2 The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command.
PAGE 982
The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface. Dell#show running-config interface gigabitethernet 1/8 interface GigabitEthernet 1/8 no ip address ipv6 address 2007::30/64 vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot.
PAGE 983
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
PAGE 984
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface gigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
PAGE 985
Figure 143. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
PAGE 986
R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c
PAGE 987
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
PAGE 988
Figure 144. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
PAGE 989
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-gi-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-gi-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.5 S1(conf-if-gi-1/3)#no shutdown Dell#show vrrp gigabitethernet 2/8 -----------------GigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.
PAGE 990
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
PAGE 991
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 S2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-gi-1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 992
00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 20.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
PAGE 993
Figure 145. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
PAGE 994
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
PAGE 995
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Dell#show vrrp gigabitethernet 2/8 GigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::25
PAGE 996
61 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
PAGE 997
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-0.txt Diags completed...
PAGE 998
Hardware Watchdog Timer The hardware watchdog command automatically reboots an Dell Networking OS switch/router with a single RPM that is unresponsive. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle. Using the Show Hardware Commands The show hardware command tree consists of commands used with the system. These commands display information from a hardware sub-component and from hardware-based feature tables.
PAGE 999
EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {1–6} stack-port {portnumber} View the counters in the field processors of the stack unit. EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {1–6} unit {0-1} counters View the details of the FP Devices and Hi gig ports on the stack-unit. EXEC Privilege mode • show hardware stack-unit {1–6} unit {0-1} details Execute a specified bShell command from the CLI without going into the bShell.
PAGE 1000
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 BR max BR min Vendor SN Datecode CheckCodeExt = = = = = 0 0 QC050955 120205 0x2b QSFP 52 Diagnostic Information =================================== QSFP 52 Rx Power measurement type =================================== QSFP 52 Temp High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Voltage High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Bias High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 RX Power High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Temp Low Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Voltage Low Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Bias Low Alarm threshold QSFP
PAGE 1001
---------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit3 55 60 75 80 85 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1 Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2 Check air flow through the system. Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly.
PAGE 1002
OID String OID Name Description NOTE: These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable opticinfo-update-interval is enabled command. Hardware MIB Buffer Statistics .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.5 dellNetFpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
PAGE 1003
Example of the show hardware stack-unit Command to View Drop Counters Statistics Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dell#show hardware drops interface gigabitethernet 2/1 Drops in Interface Gi 2/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DR
PAGE 1004
Egress Drops 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 29 0 30 0 31 0 32 0 33 0 34 0 1004 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 17 2144854 0 124904297 18 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 2
PAGE 1005
35 0 51 0 0 0 52 0 0 0 61 0 0 0 62 0 0 0 63 0 0 0 64 0 0 0 65 0 0 0 66 0 0 0 67 0 0 0 68 0 0 0 69 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 71 0 0 0 72 0 0 0 53 0 0 0 57 4659499 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 49 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 46 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
PAGE 1006
Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs. The command output in the following example has been augmented, providing detailed RX/ TX packet statistics on a per-queue basis.
PAGE 1007
1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
PAGE 1008
RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - RUNT frame counter Fragment counter VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Cou
PAGE 1009
RX - VLAN Tag Frame Counter RX - Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RX - RUNT Frame Counter RX - Fragment Counter RX - VLAN Tagged Packets RX - Ingress Dropped Packet RX - MTU Check Error Frame Counter RX - PFC Frame Priority 0 RX - PFC Frame Priority 1 RX - PFC Frame Priority 2 RX - PFC Frame Priority 3 RX - PFC Frame Priority 4 RX - PFC Frame Priority 5 RX - PFC Frame Priority 6 RX - PFC Frame Priority 7 RX - Debug Counter 0 RX - Debug Counter 1 RX - Debug Counter 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE 1010
Example of a Mini Core Text File VALID MAGIC -----------------PANIC STRING ----------------panic string is : ---------------STACK TRACE START--------------0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ----------------STACK TRACE END-----------------------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.
PAGE 1011
62 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
PAGE 1012
SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 12,000 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 96.
PAGE 1013
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 97. General IPv4 Protocols R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 79 Internet Protocol 1 7.6.1 79 Internet Control 2 Message Protocol 7.6.1 82 An Ethernet Address 6 Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 10 Using ARP to 27 Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 10 DOMAIN NAMES 3 IMPLEMENTATION 5 AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
PAGE 1014
R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 21 Dynamic Host 31 Configuration Protocol 7.6.1 23 Virtual Router 38 Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 7.6.1 3 Using 31-Bit Prefixes 0 on IPv4 Point-to21 Point Links 7.7.1 3 DHCP Relay Agent 0 Information Option 46 7.8.1 3 0 6 9 7.8.1 VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation 31 Protection Against a 28 Variant of the Tiny Fragment Attack 7.6.
PAGE 1015
RF C# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 246 Transmission of 4 IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 267 5 7.8.1 IPv6 Jumbograms 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 358 IPv6 Global 7 Unicast Address Format 7.8.1 400 IPv6 Scoped 7 Address Architecture 8.3.12.0 429 Internet 1 Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 444 3 7.8.1 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 486 Neighbor 1 Discovery for IPv6 8.3.12.
PAGE 1016
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 99. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.1 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 7.8.
PAGE 1017
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 101.
PAGE 1018
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 103. Multicast RFC# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 3569 An Overview of SourceSpecific Multicast (SSM) 7.8.
PAGE 1019
RFC# Full Name S4810 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2013 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2024 Definitions of Managed Objects for Data Link Switching using SMIv2 7.6.
PAGE 1020
RFC# Full Name S4810 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 7.6.1 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.1 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information 7.6.1 Base: Ethernet Statistics Table, Ethernet History Control Table, Ethernet History Table, Alarm Table, Event Table, Log Table 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB 7.6.
PAGE 1021
RFC# Full Name S4810 isisISAdjAreaAddrTable isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmod-interfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. 9.2(0.0) IEEE 802.1AB Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.
PAGE 1022
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-SYSTEM-COMPONENT-MIB Force10 System Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) 7.6.1 FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention 7.6.1 FORCE10-TRAP-ALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.
PAGE 1023
63 X.509v3 Dell Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.509v3 support in Dell Networking OS Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online certificate status protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.
PAGE 1024
1 An entity or organization that wants a digital certificate requests one through a CSR. 2 To request a digital certificate through a CSR, a key pair is generated and the CSR is signed using the secret private key. The CSR contains information identifying the applicant and the applicant's public key. This public key is used to verify the signature of the CSR and the Distinguished Name (DN). 3 This CSR is sent to a Certificate Authority (CA).
PAGE 1025
The Root CA generates a private key and a self-signed CA certificate. The Intermediate CA generates a private key and a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Using its private key, the root CA signs the intermediate CA’s CSR generating a CA certificate for the Intermediate CA. This intermediate CA can then sign certificates for hosts in the network and also for further intermediate CAs.
PAGE 1026
During the initial TLS protocol negotiation, both participating parties also check to see if the other’s certificate is revoked by the CA. To do this check, the devices query the CA’s designated OCSP responder on the network. The OCSP responder information is included in the presented certificate, the Intermediate CA inserts the info upon signing it, or it may be statically configured on the host. Information about installing CA certificates Dell Networking OS enables you to download and install X.
PAGE 1027
crypto ca-cert install {path} Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.509v3 certificate, the device first requests a certificate from a CA through a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). While creating a CSR, you need to provide the information about the certificate and the private key details.
PAGE 1028
• Organization Name • Organization Unit Name • Common Name • Email address • Validity • Length • Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
PAGE 1029
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 When not operating in FIPS mode, the system may support TLS 1.0 up to 1.
PAGE 1030
Configuring OCSP setting on CA You can configure the CA to contact multiple OCSP servers. To configure OCSP server for a CA, perform the following step: In the certificate mode, enter the following command: ocsp-server URL [nonce] [sign-requests] NOTE: If you have an IPv6 address in the URL, then enclose this address in square brackets. For example, http:// [1100::203]:6514.
PAGE 1031
NOTE: A CA certificate can also be revoked. Verifying Server certificates Verifying that server certificates are mandatory in the TLS protocol. As a result, all TLS-enabled applications require certificate verification, including Syslog servers. The system checks the Server certificates against installed CA certificates. Verifying client certificates Verifying that client certificates are optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria.